Manual 12679989
Copyright © 2013 YEALINK NETWORK TECHNOLOGY
Copyright © 2013 Yealink Network Technology CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No parts of this
publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, for any purpose, without the express written
permission of Yealink Network Technology CO., LTD. Under the law, reproducing includes
translating into another language or format.
When this publication is made available on media, Yealink Network Technology CO., LTD. gives
its consent to downloading and printing copies of the content provided in this file only for private
use but not for redistribution. No parts of this publication may be subject to alteration,
modification or commercial use. Yealink Network Technology CO., LTD. will not be liable for any
damages arising from use of an illegally modified or altered publication.
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS GUIDE ARE
SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND
RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS GUIDE ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE AND PRESENTED
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF PRODUCTS.
YEALINK NETWORK TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH
REGARD TO THIS GUIDE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Yealink Network Technology
CO., LTD. shall not be liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this guide.
Hereby, Yealink Network Technology CO ., LTD. declares that this phone is in conformity
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the CE, FCC.
This device is marked with the CE mark in compliance with EC Directives 2006/95/EC and 2004/108/EC.
This device is compliant with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: This device is tested and complies with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
3. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
4. Consult the dealer or an experience radio/TV technician for help.
To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the
presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, end users of
electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed-out
wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to
collect such WEEE separately.
We are striving to improve our documentation quality and we appreciate your feedback. Email your
opinions and comments to DocsFeedback@yealink.com.
Yealink SIP-T4X IP phones firmware contain third-party software under the GNU General Public License
(GPL). Yealink uses software under the specific terms of the GPL. Please refer to the GPL for the exact terms
and conditions of the license.
The original GPL license, source code of components licensed under GPL and used in Yealink products can
be downloaded online:
http://www.yealink.com/GPLOpenSource.aspx?BaseInfoCateId=293&NewsCateId=293&CateId=293.
About This Guide
The guide is intended for administrators who need to properly configure, customize,
manage, and troubleshoot the IP phone system rather than the end-users. It provides
details on the functionality and configuration of SIP-T4X IP phones.
Many of the features described in this guide involve network settings, which could affect
the IP phone performance in the network. So an understanding of the IP networking and
prior knowledge of IP telephony concepts are necessary.
This guide covers the SIP-T46G, T42G and T41P IP phones. The following related
documents for SIP-T4X IP phones are available:

Quick Installation Guides, which describe how to assemble IP phones.

Quick Reference Guides, which describe the most basic features available on IP
phones.

User Guides, which describe basic and advanced features available on IP phones.

Auto Provisioning Deployment Guide, which describes how to provision IP phones
using the configuration files.

Configuration Conversion Tool User Guide, which describes how to convert and
encrypt the configuration files using the Configuration Conversion Tool.

<y0000000000xx>.cfg and <MAC>.cfg template configuration files.

IP Phones Deployment Guide for BroadWorks Environments, which describes how
to configure the BroadSoft features on the BroadWorks web portal and IP phones.
For support or service, please contact your Yealink reseller or go to Yealink Technical
Support online http://www.yealink.com/Support.aspx.
The information detailed in this guide is applicable to the firmware version 71 or higher.
The firmware format likes x.x.x.x.rom. The second x from left should be greater than or
equal to 71(e.g., the firmware version of SIP-T46G IP phone: 28.71.0.60.rom). This
administrator guide includes the following chapters:

Chapter 1, “Product Overview” describes SIP components and SIP IP phones.

Chapter 2, “Getting Started” describes how to install and connect IP phones and
configuration methods.
v
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones

Chapter 3, “Configuring Basic Features” describes how to configure basic features
on IP phones.

Chapter 4, “Configuring Advanced Features” describes how to configure
advanced features on IP phones.

Chapter 5, “Configuring Audio Features” describes how to configure audio features
on IP phones.

Chapter 6, “Configuring Security Features” describes how to configure security
features on IP phones.

Chapter 7, “Upgrading Firmware” describes how to upgrade the firmware of IP
phones.

Chapter 8, “Resource Files” describes the resource files that can be downloaded
by IP phones.

Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting” describes how to troubleshoot IP phones and
provides some common troubleshooting solutions.

Chapter 10, “Appendix” provides the glossary, reference information about IP
phones compliant with RFC 3261, SIP call flows and sample configuration files.
This section describes the changes to this guide for each release and guide version.
Major updates have occurred to the following sections:

Language on page 47

Auto Answer on page 66

SNMP on page 170

Audio Codecs on page 185

Encrypting Configuration Files on page 203
This version is updated to incorporate T41P as one of the T4X device models. The
following section is new for this version:

Logo Customization on page 50
Major updates have occurred to the following sections:

vi
SIP IP Phone Models on page 3
About This Guide

Configuring Transmission Methods of the Internet Port and PC Port on page 23

Language on page 47

Remote Phone Book on page 123

Server Redundancy on page 152

Audio Codecs on page 185

Transport Layer Security on page 195

Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol on page 201
This version is updated to incorporate T42G as one of the T4X device models. The
following section is new for this version:

SIP IP Phone Models on page 3
Major updates have occurred to the following sections:

Reading Icons on page 15

PPPoE on page 22

Backlight on page 36

Language on page 47

Call Completion on page 68

SNMP on page 170

TR-069 Device Management on page 176

IPv6 Support on page 178

Audio Codecs on page 185

Upgrading Firmware on page 207

Configuring DSS Key on page 357
vii
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
viii
Table of Contents
About This Guide ...................................................................v
Documentations ............................................................................................................................... v
In This Guide .................................................................................................................................... v
Summary of Changes .................................................................................................................... vi
Changes for Release 71.0, Guide Version 71.170................................................................. vi
Changes for Release 71.0, Guide Version 71.150 ................................................................. vi
Changes for Release 71.0, Guide Version 71.80 .................................................................. vii
Table of Contents ................................................................. ix
Product Overview ..................................................................1
VoIP Principle .................................................................................................................................... 1
SIP Components............................................................................................................................... 2
SIP IP Phone Models ........................................................................................................................ 3
Physical Features of SIP-T4X IP Phones ................................................................................... 4
Key Features of SIP-T4X IP Phones ........................................................................................... 6
Getting Started .....................................................................9
Connecting the IP Phone ................................................................................................................. 9
Initialization Process Overview .................................................................................................... 11
Verifying Startup ............................................................................................................................ 13
Configuration Methods ................................................................................................................. 13
Phone User Interface.............................................................................................................. 13
Web User Interface ................................................................................................................ 14
Configuration Files.................................................................................................................. 14
Reading Icons ................................................................................................................................ 15
Configuring Basic Network Parameters ...................................................................................... 17
DHCP ....................................................................................................................................... 17
Configuring Network Parameters Manually ........................................................................ 19
PPPoE........................................................................................................................................ 22
Configuring Transmission Methods of the Internet Port and PC Port ................................. 23
Creating Dial Plan.......................................................................................................................... 25
Replace Rule ........................................................................................................................... 26
Dial-now .................................................................................................................................. 28
Area Code............................................................................................................................... 30
Block Out ................................................................................................................................. 31
ix
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Configuring Basic Features .................................................. 33
Wallpaper....................................................................................................................................... 34
Backlight ......................................................................................................................................... 36
User Password................................................................................................................................ 38
Administrator Password ................................................................................................................ 39
Phone Lock ..................................................................................................................................... 40
Time and Date ............................................................................................................................... 42
Language ....................................................................................................................................... 47
Loading Language Packs ...................................................................................................... 48
Specifying the Language to Use........................................................................................... 49
Logo Customization ....................................................................................................................... 50
Softkey Layout................................................................................................................................ 51
Key as Send ................................................................................................................................... 54
Hotline ............................................................................................................................................ 56
Call Log........................................................................................................................................... 58
Missed Call Log ............................................................................................................................. 59
Local Directory ............................................................................................................................... 60
Live Dialpad ................................................................................................................................... 63
Call Waiting .................................................................................................................................... 63
Auto Redial ..................................................................................................................................... 65
Auto Answer ................................................................................................................................... 66
Call Completion ............................................................................................................................. 68
Anonymous Call ............................................................................................................................. 69
Anonymous Call Rejection ............................................................................................................ 71
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................................................................ 73
Busy Tone Delay............................................................................................................................. 77
Return Code When Refuse ............................................................................................................ 78
Early Media.................................................................................................................................... 79
180 Ring Workaround .................................................................................................................... 79
Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog ..................................................................................................... 80
SIP Session Timer ........................................................................................................................... 81
Session Timer ................................................................................................................................. 82
Call Hold......................................................................................................................................... 84
Call Forward .................................................................................................................................. 86
Call Transfer ................................................................................................................................... 91
Network Conference ..................................................................................................................... 92
Transfer on Conference Hang Up ................................................................................................ 93
Directed Call Pickup ...................................................................................................................... 94
Group Call Pickup .......................................................................................................................... 97
Dialog-Info Call Pickup ................................................................................................................ 100
Call Return .................................................................................................................................... 102
Call Park........................................................................................................................................ 103
Web Server Type.......................................................................................................................... 104
x
Table of Contents
Calling Line Identification Presentation ..................................................................................... 106
Connected Line Identification Presentation .............................................................................. 107
DTMF ............................................................................................................................................. 108
Suppress DTMF Display .............................................................................................................. 111
Transfer via DTMF ........................................................................................................................ 112
Intercom........................................................................................................................................ 113
Outgoing Intercom Calls ...................................................................................................... 113
Incoming Intercom Calls ...................................................................................................... 114
Configuring Advanced Features ........................................ 117
Distinctive Ring Tones .................................................................................................................. 117
Tones ............................................................................................................................................. 121
Remote Phone Book .................................................................................................................... 123
LDAP .............................................................................................................................................. 125
Busy Lamp Field ........................................................................................................................... 128
Music on Hold .............................................................................................................................. 131
Automatic Call Distribution ......................................................................................................... 133
Message Waiting Indicator ........................................................................................................ 135
Multicast Paging .......................................................................................................................... 137
Sending RTP Stream ............................................................................................................. 137
Receiving RTP Stream .......................................................................................................... 139
Call Recording.............................................................................................................................. 142
Hot Desking .................................................................................................................................. 145
Action URL .................................................................................................................................... 147
Action URI ..................................................................................................................................... 150
Server Redundancy ..................................................................................................................... 152
LLDP ............................................................................................................................................... 157
VLAN ............................................................................................................................................. 160
VPN................................................................................................................................................ 163
Quality of Service ........................................................................................................................ 165
Network Address Translation ..................................................................................................... 168
SNMP ............................................................................................................................................ 170
802.1X Authentication.................................................................................................................. 172
TR-069 Device Management ...................................................................................................... 176
IPv6 Support ................................................................................................................................. 178
Configuring Audio Features ............................................... 183
Headset Prior ............................................................................................................................... 183
Dual Headset ............................................................................................................................... 184
Audio Codecs .............................................................................................................................. 185
Acoustic Clarity Technology ........................................................................................................ 189
Acoustic Echo Cancellation ................................................................................................. 189
Voice Activity Detection ....................................................................................................... 190
xi
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Comfort Noise Generation .................................................................................................. 191
Jitter Buffer ............................................................................................................................ 192
Configuring Security Features ............................................ 195
Transport Layer Security .............................................................................................................. 195
Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol .......................................................................................... 201
Encrypting Configuration Files ................................................................................................... 203
Upgrading Firmware ......................................................... 207
Resource Files.................................................................... 211
Replace Rule Template ............................................................................................................... 211
Dial-now Template....................................................................................................................... 212
Softkey Layout Template ............................................................................................................. 213
Local Contact File ........................................................................................................................ 215
Remote XML Phone Book ............................................................................................................ 216
Specifying the Access URL of Resource Files ............................................................................ 218
Troubleshooting ................................................................. 219
Troubleshooting Methods ........................................................................................................... 219
Viewing Log Files .................................................................................................................. 219
Capturing Packets ................................................................................................................ 222
Enabling the Watch Dog Feature ........................................................................................ 222
Getting Information from Status Indicators........................................................................ 223
Analyzing Configuration Files.............................................................................................. 223
Troubleshooting Solutions ........................................................................................................... 224
Why is the LCD screen blank? ............................................................................................. 224
Why doesn’t the IP phone get an IP address? ................................................................... 224
How do I find the basic information of the IP phone?....................................................... 225
Why doesn’t the IP phone upgrade firmware successfully? ............................................. 225
Why doesn’t the IP phone display time and date correctly? ........................................... 225
Why do I get poor sound quality during a call? ................................................................ 225
What is the difference between a remote phone book and a local phonebook? ........ 226
What is the difference between user name, register name and display name? .......... 226
How to reboot IP phone remotely? ..................................................................................... 226
How to increase or decrease the volume? ........................................................................ 226
What will happen if I connect both PoE cable and power adapter? Which has the higher
priority? .................................................................................................................................. 227
What is auto provisioning? .................................................................................................. 227
What is PnP? .......................................................................................................................... 227
Why doesn’t the IP phone update the configuration?....................................................... 227
What do “on code” and “off code” mean?........................................................................ 227
xii
Table of Contents
How to solve the IP conflict problem? ................................................................................ 228
How to reset your phone to factory configurations? ......................................................... 228
How to restore the administrator password? .................................................................... 228
Appendix .......................................................................... 229
Appendix A: Glossary ................................................................................................................. 229
Appendix B: Time Zones ............................................................................................................. 231
Appendix C: Configuration Parameters .................................................................................... 234
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files .......................................................................... 234
Basic and Advanced Feature Parameters ......................................................................... 234
Audio Feature Parameters................................................................................................... 338
Upgrading Firmware............................................................................................................ 350
Resource Files ....................................................................................................................... 351
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 356
Configuring DSS Key ............................................................................................................ 357
Appendix D: SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) ............................................................................ 372
RFC and Internet Draft Support .......................................................................................... 372
SIP Request............................................................................................................................ 373
SIP Header ............................................................................................................................ 374
SIP Responses ....................................................................................................................... 375
SIP Session Description Protocol (SDP) Usage .................................................................. 378
Appendix E: SIP Call Flows ......................................................................................................... 379
Successful Call Setup and Disconnect ............................................................................... 380
Unsuccessful Call Setup—Called User is Busy .................................................................. 382
Unsuccessful Call Setup—Called User Does Not Answer ................................................ 386
Successful Call Setup and Call Hold .................................................................................. 389
Successful Call Setup and Call Waiting ............................................................................. 391
Call Transfer without Consultation ...................................................................................... 396
Call Transfer with Consultation ............................................................................................ 400
Always Call Forward ............................................................................................................ 406
Busy Call Forward ................................................................................................................ 409
No Answer Call Forward ..................................................................................................... 412
Call Conference.................................................................................................................... 415
Appendix F: Sample Configuration File .................................................................................... 420
Index ................................................................................. 427
xiii
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
xiv
Product Overview
This chapter contains the following information about SIP-T4X IP phones:

VoIP Principle

SIP Components

SIP IP Phone Models
VoIP
VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) is a technology using the Internet Protocol instead of
traditional Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) technology for voice
communications.
It is a family of technologies, methodologies, communication protocols, and
transmission techniques for the delivery of voice communications and multimedia
sessions over IP networks. The H.323 and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) are two
popular VoIP protocols that are found in widespread implement.
H.323
H.323 is a recommendation from the ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector
(ITU-T) that defines the protocols to provide audio-visual communication sessions on
any packet network. The H.323 standard addresses call signaling and control,
multimedia transport and control, and bandwidth control for point-to-point and
multi-point conferences.
It is widely implemented by voice and video conference equipment manufacturers, is
used within various Internet real-time applications such as GnuGK and NetMeeting and
is widely deployed worldwide by service providers and enterprises for both voice and
video services over IP networks.
SIP
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) is the Internet Engineering Task Force’s (IETF’s) standard
for multimedia conferencing over IP. It is an ASCII-based, application-layer control
protocol (defined in RFC 3261) that can be used to establish, maintain, and terminate
calls between two or more endpoints. Like other VoIP protocols, SIP is designed to
address the functions of signaling and session management within a packet telephony
network. Signaling allows call information to be carried across network boundaries.
Session management provides the ability to control the attributes of an end-to-end call.
1
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
SIP provides capabilities to:

Determine the location of the target endpoint -- SIP supports address resolution,
name mapping, and call redirection.

Determine the media capabilities of the target endpoint -- Via Session Description
Protocol (SDP), SIP determines the “lowest level” of common services between
endpoints. Conferences are established using only the media capabilities that can
be supported by all endpoints.

Determine the availability of the target endpoint -- A call cannot be completed
because the target endpoint is unavailable. SIP determines whether the called
party is already on the IP phone or did not answer in the allotted number of rings. It
then returns a message indicating why the target endpoint was unavailable.

Establish a session between the origin and target endpoint -- The call can be
completed, SIP establishes a session between endpoints. SIP also supports mid-call
changes, such as the addition of another endpoint to the conference or the
changing of a media characteristic or codec.

Handle the transfer and termination of calls -- SIP supports the transfer of calls from
one endpoint to another. During a call transfer, SIP simply establishes a session
between the transferee and a new endpoint (specified by the transferring party)
and terminates the session between the transferee and the transferring party. At
the end of a call, SIP terminates the sessions between all parties.
SIP is a peer-to-peer protocol. The peers in a session are called User Agents (UAs). A
user agent can function as one of the following roles:

User Agent Client (UAC) -- A client application that initiates the SIP request.

User Agent Server (UAS) -- A server application that contacts the user when a SIP
request is received and that returns a response on behalf of the user.
User Agent Client (UAC)
The UAC is an application that initiates up to six feasible SIP requests to the UAS. The six
requests issued by the UAC are: INVITE, ACK, OPTIONS, BYE, CANCEL and REGISTER.
When the SIP session is being initiated by the UAC SIP component, the UAC determines
the information essential for the request, which is the protocol, the port and the IP
address of the UAS to which the request is being sent. This information can be dynamic
and this will make it challenging to put through a firewall. For this reason it may be
recommended to open the specific application type on the firewall. The UAC is also
capable of using the information in the request URI to establish the course of the SIP
request to its destination, as the request URI always specifies the host which is essential.
The port and protocol are not always specified by the request URI. Thus if the request
does not specify a port or protocol, a default port or protocol is contacted. Using this
2
Product Overview
method may be the preferred measure when not using an application layer firewall,
application layer firewalls like to know what applications are flowing though which
ports and it is possible using content types of other applications other than the one you
are trying to let through which has been denied.
User agent server (UAS)
UAS is the server that hosts the application responsible for receiving the SIP requests
from a UAC, and on reception returns a response to the request back to the UAC. The
UAS may issue multiple responses to the UAC, not necessarily a single response.
Communication between UAC and UAS is client/server and peer-to–peer.
Typically, a SIP endpoint is capable of functioning as both a UAC and a UAS, but it
functions only as one or the other per transaction. Whether the endpoint functions as a
UAC or a UAS depends on the UA that initiates the request.
This section introduces the SIP-T4X IP phone family. SIP-T4X IP phones are endpoints in
the overall network topology, which are designed to interoperate with other compatible
equipments including application servers, media servers, internet-working gateways,
voice bridges, and other endpoints. SIP-T4X IP phones are characterized by a large
number of functions, which simplify business communication with a high standard of
security and can work seamlessly with a large number of SIP PBXs.
SIP-T4X IP phones provide a powerful and flexible IP communication solution for Ethernet
TCP/IP networks, delivering excellent voice quality. The high-resolution graphic display
supplies content in multiple languages for system status, call history and directory
access. SIP-T4X IP phones also support advanced functionalities, including LDAP, Busy
Lamp Field, Sever Redundancy and Network Conference.
The following IP phone models are described:

SIP-T46G

SIP-T42G

SIP-T41P
SIP-T4X IP phones comply with the SIP standard (RFC 3261), and they can only be used
within a network that supports this type of phone.
For successfully operating as SIP endpoints in your network, SIP-T4X IP phones must meet
the following requirements:

A working IP network is established.

Routers are configured for VoIP.

VoIP gateways are configured for SIP.

The latest (or compatible) firmware of SIP-T4X IP phones is available.
3
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones

A call server is active and configured to receive and send SIP messages.
This section lists the available physical features of SIP-T4X IP phones.
SIP-T46G
Physical Features:
4
-
4.3” TFT-LCD, 480 x 272 pixel, 16.7M colors
-
6 VoIP accounts, BroadSoft/Avaya/Asterisk validated
-
HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker
-
41 keys including 10 line keys
-
1xRJ9 (4P4C) handset port
-
1xRJ9 (4P4C) headset port
-
2xRJ45 10/100/1000M Ethernet ports
-
1XRJ12 (6P6C) expansion module port
-
14 LEDs: 1xpower, 10xline, 1xmute, 1xheadset, 1xspeakerphone
-
Power adapter: AC 100~240V input and DC 5V/2A output
-
Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)
-
Built-in USB port, support Bluetooth headset
Product Overview
SIP-T42G
Physical Features:
-
192 x 64 graphic LCD
-
3 VoIP accounts, BroadSoft/Avaya/Asterisk validated
-
HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker
-
35 keys including 6 line keys
-
1xRJ9 (4P4C) handset port
-
1xRJ9 (4P4C) headset port
-
2xRJ45 10/100/1000M Ethernet ports
-
1XRJ12 (6P6C) EHS36 headset adapter port
-
10 LEDs: 1xpower, 6xline, 1xmute, 1xheadset, 1xspeakerphone
-
Power adapter: AC 100~240V input and DC 5V/1.2A output
-
Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)
5
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
SIP-T41P
Physical Features:
-
192 x 64 graphic LCD
-
3 VoIP accounts, BroadSoft/Avaya/Asterisk validated
-
HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker
-
35 keys including 6 line keys
-
1xRJ9 (4P4C) handset port
-
1xRJ9 (4P4C) headset port
-
2xRJ45 10/100M Ethernet ports
-
1XRJ12 (6P6C) EHS36 headset adapter port
-
10 LEDs: 1xpower, 6xline, 1xmute, 1xheadset, 1xspeakerphone
-
Power adapter: AC 100~240V input and DC 5V/1.2A output
-
Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)
In addition to physical features introduced above, SIP-T4X IP phones also support the
following key features when running the latest firmware:

Phone Features
-
Call Options: emergency call, call waiting, call hold, call mute, call forward,
call transfer, call pickup, 3-way conference.
6
Basic Features: DND, phone lock, auto redial, live dialpad, dial plan, hotline,
Product Overview
caller identity, auto answer.
-
Advanced Features: BLF, server redundancy, distinctive ring tones, remote
phone book, LDAP, 802.1x authentication.

Codecs and Voice Features
-
Wideband codec: G.722
-
Narrowband codec: G.711, G.723.1, G.726, G.729AB, GSM, iLBC (for SIP-T46G
only).



-
VAD, CNG, AEC, PLC, AJB, AGC
-
Full-duplex speakerphone with AEC
Network Features
-
SIP v1 (RFC2543), v2 (RFC3261)
-
IPv4/IPv6 support
-
NAT Traversal: STUN mode
-
DTMF: INBAND, RFC2833, SIP INFO
-
Proxy mode and peer-to-peer SIP link mode
-
IP assignment: Static/DHCP/PPPoE (for SIP-T46G only)
-
TFTP/DHCP client
-
HTTP/HTTPS server
-
DNS client
-
NAT/DHCP server
Management
-
FTP/TFTP/HTTP/PnP auto-provision
-
Configuration: browser/phone/auto-provision
-
Direct IP call without SIP proxy
-
Dial number via SIP server
-
Dial URL via SIP server
Security
-
HTTPS (server/client)
-
SRTP (RFC3711)
-
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
-
VLAN (802.1q), QoS
-
Digest authentication using MD5/MD5-sess
-
Secure configuration file via AES encryption
-
Phone lock for personal privacy protection
-
Admin/User configuration mode
7
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
8
Getting Started
This chapter provides basic information and installation instructions of SIP-T4X IP phones.
This chapter provides the following sections:

Connecting the IP Phone

Initialization Process Overview

Verifying Startup

Configuration Methods

Reading Icons

Configuring Basic Network Parameters

Creating Dial Plan
This section introduces how to install SIP-T4X IP phones with the components in
packaging contents.
Note
1.
Attach the stand
2.
Connect the handset and optional headset
3.
Connect the network and power
A headset, wall mount bracket and power adapter are not included in packaging
contents.
1)
Attach the stand:
Desk Mount Method
9
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Wall Mount Method (Optional)
Note
For more information on how to mount the phone to a wall, refer to Yealink Wall Mount
Quick Installation Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones.
2)
Note
Connect the handset, optional headset and Bluetooth headset:
Wireless headset adapter EHS36 and Bluetooth USB dongle should be purchased
separately.
For more information on how to use the EHS36 on the IP phone, refer to Yealink EHS36
User Guide.
Bluetooth can only be used on the SIP-T46G IP phone. For more information on how to use
the Bluetooth on the SIP-T46G IP phone, refer to Yealink Bluetooth USB Dongle BT40 User
Guide.
EXT port can also be used to connect the expansion module EXP40. For more information
on how to connect the EXP40, refer to Yealink EXP40 User Guide.
3)
Connect the network and power:

AC power

Power over Ethernet (PoE)
AC Power
To connect the AC power and network:
1.
Connect the DC plug of the power adapter to the DC5V port on IP phones and
connect the other end of the power adapter into an electrical power outlet.
10
Getting Started
2.
Connect the included or a standard Ethernet cable between the Internet port on IP
phones and the one on the wall or switch/hub device port.
Power over Ethernet
With the included or a regular Ethernet cable, IP phones can be powered from a
PoE-compliant switch or hub.
To connect the PoE:
1.
Connect the Ethernet cable between the Internet port on IP phones and an
available port on the in-line power switch/hub.
Note
If in-line power switch/hub is provided, you don’t need to connect the phone to the power
adapter. Make sure the switch/hub is PoE-compliant.
IP phones can also share the network with another network device such as a PC
(personal computer). It is an optional connection.
Important! Do not unplug or remove power while IP phones are updating firmware and
configurations.
The initialization process of IP phones is responsible for network connectivity and
operation of IP phones in your local network.
Once you connect your IP phone to the network and to an electrical supply, the IP phone
11
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
begins its initialization process.
During the initialization process, the following events proceed:
Loading the ROM file
The ROM file resides in the flash memory of IP phones. IP phones come from the factory
with a ROM file preloaded. During initialization, IP phones run a bootstrap loader that
loads and executes the ROM file.
Configuring the VLAN
If IP phones are connected to a switch, the switch notifies IP phones of the VLAN
information defined on the switch (if using LLDP). IP phones can then proceed with the
DHCP request for its network settings (if using DHCP).
Querying the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server
IP phones are capable of querying a DHCP server. DHCP is enabled on IP phones by
default. The following network parameters can be obtained from the DHCP server
during initialization:

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

Primary DNS (Domain Name Server)

Secondary DNS
You need to configure the network parameters of IP phones manually if any of them is
not supplied by the DHCP server. For more information on configuring network
parameters manually, refer to Configuring Network Parameters Manually on page 19.
Contacting the auto provisioning server
SIP-T4X IP phones support the FTP, TFTP, HTTP, and HTTPS protocols for auto provisioning
and are configured by default to use TFTP protocol. If IP phones are configured to obtain
configurations from the TFTP server, they will connect to the TFTP server and download
the configuration file(s) during booting up. IP phones will be able to resolve and apply
the configurations written in the configuration file(s). If IP phones do not obtain the
configurations from the TFTP server, IP phones will use the configurations stored in the
flash memory.
Updating firmware
If the access URL of the firmware is defined in the configuration file, the IP phone will
download the firmware from the provisioning server. If the MD5 value of the
downloaded firmware file differs from that of the image stored in the flash memory, the
IP phone performs a firmware update.
12
Getting Started
Downloading the resource files
In addition to configuration file(s), IP phones may require resource files before it can
deliver service. These resource files are optional, but if some particular features are
being deployed, these files are required.
The followings show examples of resource files:

Language packs

Ring tones

Contact files
After connected to the power and network, the IP phone begins the initializing process
by cycling through the following steps:
1.
The power indicator LED illuminates.
2.
The message “Initializing…Please wait” appears on the LCD screen during the IP
phone starts up.
3.
4.
The main LCD screen displays the following:

Time and date

Soft key labels
Press the OK key to check the IP phone status, the LCD screen displays the valid IP
address, MAC address, firmware version, etc.
If the IP phone has successfully passed through these steps, it starts up properly and is
ready for use.
You can use the following methods to set up and configure IP phones:

Phone User Interface

Web User Interface

Configuration Files
The following sections describe how to configure IP phones using each method above.
An administrator or a user can configure and use IP phones via phone user interface.
Specific features access is restricted to the administrator. These specific features are
password protected by default. The default password is “admin“(case-sensitive). Not
13
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
all features are available on configuring via phone user interface.
An administrator or a user can configure IP phones via web user interface. The default
user name and password for the administrator to log into the web user interface are
both “admin” (case-sensitive). Almost all features are available for configuring via web
user interface. IP phones support both HTTP and HTTPS protocols for accessing the web
user interface. For more information, refer to Web Server Type on page 104.
You can deploy IP phones using configuration files. There are two configuration files
both of which are CFG formatted. We call them Common CFG file and MAC-Oriented
CFG file. A Common CFG file will be effectual for all IP phones of the same model.
However, a MAC-Oriented CFG file will only be effectual for a specific IP phone. The
Common CFG file has a fixed name for each IP phone model, while the MAC-Oriented
CFG file is named as the MAC address of IP phones. For example, if the MAC address of
a SIP-T46G IP phone is 001565113af5, the names of these two configuration files must be:
y000000000028.cfg and 001565113af5.cfg.
The name of the Common CFG file for each SIP-T4X IP phone model is:

SIP-T46G: y000000000028.cfg

SIP-T42G: y000000000029.cfg

SIP-T41P: y000000000036.cfg
In order to deploy IP phones using configuration files (<y0000000000xx>.cfg and
<MAC>.cfg), you need to use a text-based editing application to edit the configuration
files, and store configuration files to a provisioning server. IP phones support
downloading configuration files using any of the following protocols: FTP, TFTP, HTTP and
HTTPS.
IP phones can obtain the address of the provisioning server during startup through one
of the following processes: Zero Touch, PnP, DHCP Options and Phone Flash. Then IP
phones download configuration files from the provisioning server, resolve and update
the configurations written in the configuration files. This entire process is called auto
provisioning. For more information on auto provisioning, refer to Yealink SIP-T4X IP
Phones Auto Provisioning Guide.
When modifying parameters, learn the following:

Parameters in configuration files override those stored in IP phones’ flash memory.

The .cfg extension of the configuration files must be in lowercase.

Each line in a configuration file must use the following format and adhere to the
following rules:
14
Getting Started
variable-name = value
-
Associate only one value with one variable.
-
Separate variable name and value with equal sign.
-
Set only one variable per line.
-
Put the variable and value on the same line, and do not break the line.
-
Comment the variable on a separated line. Use the pound (#) delimiter to
distinguish the comments.
IP phones can accept two sources of configuration data:

Downloaded from configuration files

Changed on the phone user interface or the web user interface
The latest value configured on the IP phone takes effect finally.
Icons associated with different features may appear on the LCD screen. The following
table provides a description for each icon on SIP-T4X IP phone models.
T46G
T42G/T41P
Description
Network is unavailable
Registered successfully
Register failed
Registering
Hands-free speakerphone mode
Handset mode
Headset mode
Voice Mail
/
Text Message
Auto Answer
Do Not Disturb
15
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
T46G
T42G/T41P
Description
Call Forward
Call Hold
Call Mute
Ringer volume is 0
Phone Lock
Multi-lingual lowercase letters input
mode
Multi-lingual uppercase letters input
mode
Alphanumeric input mode
Numeric input mode
Multi-lingual uppercase and
lowercase letters input mode
Received Calls
Placed Calls
Missed Calls
Recording box is full
A call cannot be recorded
Recording starts successfully
Recording cannot be started
Recording cannot be stopped
VPN is enabled
/
/
16
Bluetooth
Bluetooth headset is both paired and
connected
Getting Started
T46G
T42G/T41P
Description
/
Conference
/
The default contact icon
/
The default caller photo
This section describes how to configure basic network parameters for the IP phone.
Note
This section mainly introduces IPv4 network parameters. For more information on IPv6,
refer to IPv6 Support on page 178.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network protocol used to dynamically
allocate network parameters to network hosts. The automatic allocation of network
parameters to hosts eases the administrative burden of maintaining an IP network. IP
phones comply with the DHCP specifications documented in RFC 2131. If DHCP is used,
IP phones connected to the network become operational without having to be manually
assigned IP addresses and additional network parameters. DHCP is enabled on IP
phones by default.
DHCP Option
DHCP provides a framework for passing information to TCP/IP network devices. Network
and other control information are carried in tagged data items that are stored in the
options field of the DHCP message. The data items themselves are also called options.
DHCP can be initiated by simply connecting the IP phone with the network. IP phones
broadcast DISCOVER messages to request the network information carried in DHCP
options, and the DHCP server responds with the specific values in the corresponding
options.
The following table lists the common DHCP options supported by IP phones.
Parameter
DHCP Option
Subnet Mask
1
Time Offset
2
Description
Specify the client’s subnet mask.
Specify the offset of the client's subnet in
seconds from Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC).
17
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter
DHCP Option
Router
3
Time Server
4
Domain Name
Server
6
Log Server
7
Host Name
12
Domain Server
15
Broadcast
Address
28
Network Time
Protocol
42
Servers
Vendor-Specific
Information
Vendor Class
Identifier
TFTP Server
Name
Description
Specify a list of IP addresses for routers on the
client’s subnet.
Specify a list of time servers available to the
client.
Specify a list of domain name servers
available to the client.
Specify a list of MIT-LCS UDP servers
available to the client.
Specify the name of the client.
Specify the domain name that client should
use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
Specify the broadcast address in use on the
client's subnet.
Specify a list of the NTP servers available to
the client by IP address.
43
Identify the vendor-specific information.
60
Identify the vendor type.
Identify a TFTP server when the 'sname' field
66
in the DHCP header has been used for DHCP
options.
Identify a bootfile when the 'file' field in the
Bootfile Name
67
DHCP header has been used for DHCP
options.
Procedure
DHCP can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure DHCP on the IP phone.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
DHCP on page 234.
Configure DHCP on the IP phone.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=network&q=load
18
Getting Started
Phone User Interface
Configure DHCP on the IP phone.
To configure DHCP via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Basic.
2.
In the IPv4 Config block, mark the DHCP radio box.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after reboot.
4.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure DHCP via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv4.
2.
Press
3.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the DHCP from the Type field.
The IP phone reboots automatically to make settings effective after a period of time.
If DHCP is disabled or IP phones cannot obtain network parameters from the DHCP
server, you need to configure the network parameters manually. The following
parameters should be configured for IP phones to establish network connectivity:

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS
19
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Procedure
Network parameters can be configured manually using the configuration files or locally.
Configure network parameters of
the IP phone manually.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Static Network Settings on page
235.
Configure network parameters of
the IP phone manually.
Web User Interface
Local
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=network&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure network parameters of
the IP phone manually.
To configure the IP address mode via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Basic.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Mode (IPv4/IPv6).
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after reboot.
4.
20
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
Getting Started
To configure a static IPv4 address via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Basic.
2.
In the IPv4 Config block, mark the Static IP Address radio box.
3.
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary DNS and secondary
DNS in the corresponding fields.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after reboot.
5.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure the IP address mode via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port.
2.
Press
or
to highlight the IP Address Mode field.
3.
Press
or
to select IPv4 or IPv4&IPv6 from the IP Address Mode field.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
The IP phone reboots automatically to make settings effective after a period of time.
To configure a static IPv4 address via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv4.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the desired values in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Primary DNS
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the Static IP from the Type field.
and Secondary DNS fields respectively.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
The IP phone reboots automatically to make settings effective after a period of time.
Note
Using the wrong network parameters may result in inaccessibility of your phone and may
also have an impact on your network performance. For more information on these
parameters, contact your network administrator.
21
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) is a network protocol used by Internet
Service Providers (ISPs) to provide Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) high speed Internet
services. PPPoE allows an office or building-full of users to share a common DSL
connection to the Internet. PPPoE connection is supported by the IP phone Internet port.
Contact your ISP for the PPPoE user name and password. PPPoE is not applicable to
SIP-T42G and SIP-T41P IP phones.
Procedure
PPPoE can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure PPPoE on the IP phone.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
PPPoE on page 237.
Configure PPPoE on the IP phone.
Web User Interface
Local
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=network&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure PPPoE on the IP phone.
To configure PPPoE via web user interface:
22
1.
Click on Network->Basic.
2.
In the IPv4 Config block, mark the PPPoE radio box.
3.
Enter the user name and password in the corresponding fields.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Getting Started
A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after reboot.
5.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure PPPoE via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv4.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the user name and password in the corresponding fields.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the PPPoE from the Type field.
The IP phone reboots automatically to make settings effective after a period of time.
There are two Ethernet ports on the back of IP phones: Internet port and PC port. Three
optional methods of transmission configuration for SIP-T4X IP phone Internet or PC
Ethernet ports:

Auto-negotiation

Half-duplex

Full-duplex
Auto-negotiation is configured for both Internet and PC ports on the IP phone by default.
Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation means that all connected devices choose common transmission
parameters (e.g., speed and duplex mode) to transmit voice or data over Ethernet. This
process entails devices first sharing transmission capabilities and then selecting the
highest performance transmission mode supported by both. You can configure the
Internet port and PC port on IP phones to auto-negotiate during the transmission.
23
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Half-duplex
Half-duplex transmission refers to transmitting voice or data in both directions, but in
one direction at a time; this means one device can send data on the line, but not
receive data simultaneously. You can configure the half-duplex transmission on both
Internet port and PC port for IP phones to transmit in 10Mbps, 100Mbps or 1000Mbps
(not applicable to SIP-T41P).
Full-duplex
Full-duplex transmission means refers to transmitting voice or data in both directions at
the same time; this means one device can send data on the line while receiving data.
You can configure the full-duplex transmission on both Internet port and PC port for IP
phones to transmit in 10Mbps, 100Mbps or 1000Mbps (not applicable to SIP-T41P).
Procedure
The transmission method of Ethernet port can be configured using the configuration files
or locally.
Configure the transmission
method of Ethernet port.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Internet and PC Ports
Transmission Methods on page
24
Getting Started
239.
Configure the transmission
method of Ethernet port.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=network-adv&q=load
To configure the transmission method of Ethernet port via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of WAN Port Link.
3.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of PC Port Link.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Regular expression, often called a pattern, is an expression that specifies a set of strings.
A regular expression provides a concise and flexible means to “match” (specify and
recognize) strings of text, such as particular characters, words, or patterns of characters.
Regular expression is used by many text editors, utilities, and programming languages
to search and manipulate text based on patterns.
Regular expression can be used to define IP phone dial plan. Dial plan is a string of
characters that governs the way for IP phones processing the inputs received from the IP
phone keypads. IP phones support the following dial plan features:

Replace Rule

Dial-now

Area Code
25
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones

Block Out
You need to know the following basic regular expression syntax when creating dial
plan:
The dot “.” can be used as a placeholder or multiple placeholders for
.
any string. Example:
“12.” would match “123”, “1234”, “12345”, “12abc”, etc.
x
The “x” can be used as a placeholder for any character. Example:
“12x” would match “121”, “122”, “123”, “12a”, etc.
The dash “-” can be used to match a range of characters within the
-
brackets. Example:
“[5-7]” would match the number “5”, ”6” or ”7”.
The comma “,” can be used as a separator within the bracket.
,
Example:
“[2,5,8]” would match the number ”2”, “5” or “8”.
The square bracket "[]" can be used as a placeholder for a single
[]
character which matches any of a set of characters. Example:
"91[5-7]1234"would match “9151234”, “9161234”, “9171234”.
The parenthesis "( )" can be used to group together patterns, for
()
instance, to logically combine two or more patterns. Example:
"([1-9])([2-7])3" would match “923”, “153”, “673”, etc.
The “$” followed by the sequence number of a parenthesis means
the characters placed in the parenthesis. The sequence number
stands for the corresponding parenthesis. Example:
$
A replace rule configuration, Prefix: "001(xxx)45(xx)", Replace:
"9001$145$2". When you dial out "0012354599" on your phone, the IP
phone will replace the number with "90012354599". “$1” means 3
digits in the first parenthesis, that is, “235”. “$2” means 2 digits in the
second parenthesis, that is, “99”.
Replace rule is an alternative string that replaces the numbers entered by the user. IP
phones support up to 100 replace rules, which can be created either one by one or in
batch using a replace rule template. For more information on the replace rule template,
refer to Replace Rule Template on page 211.
26
Getting Started
Procedure
Replace rule can be created using the configuration files or locally.
Create the replace rule for the IP
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
phone.
For more information, refer to Dial
Plan on page 240.
Create the replace rule for the IP
phone.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=settings-dialplan&q=load
To create a replace rule via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Replace Rule.
2.
Enter the string in the Prefix field.
3.
Enter the string in the Replace field.
4.
Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank.
If you leave the field blank or enter 0, the replace rule applies to all accounts on the
IP phone.
5.
Click Add to add the replace rule.
27
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Dial-now is a string used to match the numbers entered by the user. When entered
numbers match the predefined dial-now rule, IP phones will automatically dial out the
numbers without employing the send key. IP phones support up to 100 dial-now rules,
which can be created either one by one or in batch using a dial-now rule template. For
more information on the dial-now template, refer to Dial-now Template on page 212.
Delay Time for Dial-now Rule
IP phones will automatically dial out the entered number, which matches the dial-now
rule, after a specified period of time.
Procedure
Dial-now rule can be created using the configuration files or locally.
Create the dial-now rule for the IP
phone.
For more information, refer to Dial
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Plan on page 240.
Configure the delay time for the
dial-now rule.
For more information, refer to Dial
Plan on page 240.
Create the dial-now rule for the IP
phone.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
Web User Interface
?p=settings-dialnow&q=load
Configure the delay time for the
dial-now rule.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
To create a dial-now rule via web user interface:
28
1.
Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Dial-now.
2.
Enter the desired value in the Rule field.
3.
Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank.
Getting Started
If you leave the field blank or enter 0, the dial-now rule applies to all accounts on
the IP phone.
4.
Click Add to add the dial-now rule.
To configure the delay time for the dial-now rule via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Enter the desired time within 1-14 (in seconds) in the Time-Out For Dial-Now Rule
field.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
29
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Area codes are also known as Numbering Plan Areas (NPAs). They usually indicate
geographical areas in one country. When entered numbers match the predefined area
code rule, the IP phone will automatically add the area code in front of the numbers and
dial out. IP phones only support one area code rule.
Procedure
Area code rule can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Create the area code rule and
specify the maximum and
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
minimum lengths of the entered
numbers.
For more information, refer to Dial
Plan on page 240.
Create the area code rule and
specify the maximum and
minimum lengths of entered
Local
Web User Interface
numbers.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=settings-areacode&q=load
To configure an area code rule via web user interface:
30
1.
Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Area Code.
2.
Enter desired values in the Code, Min Length (1-15) and Max Length (1-15) fields.
3.
Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank.
Getting Started
If you leave the field blank or enter 0, the area code rule applies to all accounts on
the IP phone.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Block out rule prevents users from dialing out specific numbers. When entered numbers
match the predefined block out rule, the LCD screen prompts “Forbidden Number”. IP
phones support up to 10 block out rules.
Procedure
Block out rule can be created using the configuration files or locally.
Create the block out rule for the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
IP phone.
For more information, refer to Dial
Plan on page 240.
Create the block out rule for the
desired line.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=settings-blackout&q=load
To create a block out rule via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Block Out.
2.
Enter the desired value in the BlockOut Number field.
3.
Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank.
If you leave the field blank or enter 0, the block out rule applies to all accounts on
31
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
the IP phone.
4.
32
Click Confirm to add the block out rule.
Configuring Basic Features
This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following
basic features:

Wallpaper

Backlight

User Password

Administrator Password

Phone Lock

Time and Date

Language

Logo Customization

Softkey Layout

Key as Send

Hotline

Call Log

Missed Call Log

Local Directory

Live Dialpad

Call Waiting

Auto Redial

Auto Answer

Call Completion

Anonymous Call

Anonymous Call Rejection

Do Not Disturb

Busy Tone Delay

Return Code When Refuse

Early Media

180 Ring Workaround

Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog

SIP Session Timer

Session Timer
33
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones

Call Hold

Call Forward

Call Transfer

Network Conference

Transfer on Conference Hang Up

Directed Call Pickup

Group Call Pickup

Dialog-Info Call Pickup

Call Return

Call Park

Web Server Type

Calling Line Identification Presentation

Connected Line Identification Presentation

DTMF

Suppress DTMF Display

Transfer via DTMF

Intercom
Wallpaper is an image used as the background of the phone idle screen. Users can
select an image from IP phones’ built-in background or customize wallpaper from
personal pictures. To set the customized wallpaper as phone background, you need to
upload the customized wallpaper to the IP phone in advance. The wallpaper feature is
not applicable to SIP-T42G and SIP-T41P IP phones.
The following table lists the wallpaper image format and resolution for the SIP-T46G IP
phone:
Wallpaper Image Format
Resolution
Size
.jpg/.png/.bmp
<=480*272
<=5MB
Procedure
Wallpaper can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Specify the access URL of the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
customized wallpaper.
For more information, refer to
Access URL of Wallpaper Image
34
Configuring Basic Features
on page 355.
Upload the customized
wallpaper.
Change the wallpaper via web
Web User Interface
Local
user interface.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=settings-preference&q=load
Phone User Interface
Change the wallpaper via phone
user interface.
To upload customized wallpaper via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Preference.
2.
In the Upload Wallpaper field, click Browse to locate the wallpaper image from
your local system.
3.
Click Upload to upload the file.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
The customized wallpaper appears in the pull-down list of Wallpaper.
To change the wallpaper via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Preference.
35
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Select the desired wallpaper from the pull-down list of Wallpaper.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To change the wallpaper via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Basic->Display->Wallpaper.
2.
Press
3.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired wallpaper.
Backlight determines the brightness of the LCD screen display, allowing for easy
reading in darkened environments. Backlight time specifies the delay time to turn off or
dusky the backlight when the IP phone is inactive.
You can configure the backlight time as one of the following types:

Always On: Backlight is turned on permanently.

1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min: Backlight is turned off or turned dusky when the IP
phone is inactive after a preset period of time. It is automatically turned on if the
status of the IP phone changes or any key is pressed.
Backlight On Intensity is used to adjust the backlight intensity of the LCD screen, and
Backlight Idle Intensity is used to turn off or dusky the backlight after a period of
inactivity. Backlight On Intensity and Backlight Idle Intensity are not applicable to
SIP-T42G and SIP-T41P IP phones.
Procedure
Backlight can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configuration File
36
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configure the backlight of the
LCD screen.
Configuring Basic Features
For more information, refer to
Backlight on page 244.
Configure the backlight of the
LCD screen.
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
?p=settings-preference&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure the backlight of the
LCD screen.
To configure the backlight via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Preference.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Backlight Idle Intensity.
3.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Backlight On Intensity.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Backlight Time.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the backlight via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Basic->Display->General.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired level from the
Backlight On Intensity field.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
Backlight Idle Intensity field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired time from the
Backlight Time field.
5.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
37
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Some menu options are protected with two privilege levels, user and administrator,
each with its own password. When logging into the web user interface, you need to
enter the user name and password to access various menu options.
A user or an administrator can change the user password. The default user password is
“user”. For security reasons, the user or the administrator should change the default
user password as soon as possible.
Procedure
User password can be changed using the configuration files or locally.
Change the user password of the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
IP phone.
For more information, refer to
User Password on page 245.
Change the user password of the
IP phone.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=security&q=load
To change the user password via web user interface:
1.
Click on Security->Password.
2.
Select user from the pull-down list of User Type.
3.
Enter a new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields.
A new password should contain at least 6 characters, where at least one numeric
and one alphabetic character. Valid characters contain A-Z, a-z, 0-9,#,!,@,-,.,*,+
and $.
4.
Note
38
Click Confirm to accept the change.
If logging into the web user interface of the phone with the user credential, user needs to
enter the current user password in the Old Password field.
Configuring Basic Features
Advanced menu options are strictly for use by administrators. Users can configure them
only if they have administrator privileges.
The administrator password can only be changed by an administrator. The default
administrator password is “admin”. For security reasons, the administrator should
change the default administrator password as soon as possible.
Procedure
Administrator password can be changed using the configuration files or locally.
Change the administrator
password.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Administrator Password on page
246.
Change the administrator
password.
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
?p=security&q=load
Phone User Interface
Change the administrator
password.
To change the administrator password via web user interface:
1.
Click on Security->Password.
2.
Select admin from the pull-down list of User Type.
3.
Enter the current administrator password in the Old Password field.
4.
Enter a new administrator password in the New Password and Confirm Password
fields.
A new password should contain at least 6 characters, where at least one numeric
and one alphabetic character. Valid characters contain A-Z, a-z, 0-9,#,!,@,-,.,*,+
and $.
39
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To change the administrator password via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Set Password.
2.
Enter the current administrator password in the Current Password field.
3.
Enter a new administrator password in the New Password field and Confirm
Password field.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Phone lock is used to lock the IP phone to prevent it from unauthorized use. Once the IP
phone is locked, a user must enter the password to unlock it. IP phones offer three types
of phone lock: Menu Key, Function Key and All Keys. The IP phone will not be locked
immediately after the phone lock type is configured. One of the following steps is also
needed:
-
Long press the pound key when the IP phone is idle.
-
Press the keypad lock key (if configured) when the IP phone is idle.
In addition to the above steps, you can configure IP phones to automatically lock the
keypad after a period of time.
Procedure
Phone lock can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the phone lock type.
Change the unlock password.
Configure the IP phone to
automatically lock the keypad
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
after a time interval.
For more information, refer to
Phone Lock on page 246.
Assign a keypad lock key.
For more information, refer to
Keypad Lock Key on page 361.
Configure the phone lock type.
Change the unlock password.
Local
Web User Interface
Configure the IP phone to
automatically lock the keypad
after a time interval.
Navigate to:
40
Configuring Basic Features
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-phonelock&q=lo
ad
Assign a keypad lock key.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=dsskey&model=1&q=loa
d&linepage=1
Phone User Interface
Configure the phone lock type.
Assign a keypad lock key.
To configure phone lock via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Phone Lock.
2.
Select the desired type from the pull-down list of Keypad Lock Enable.
3.
Select the desired type from the pull-down list of Keypad Lock Type.
4.
Enter unlock password (numeric characters) in the Phone Unlock PIN (0~15 Digit)
field.
5.
Enter the desired time in the Phone Lock Time Out (0~3600s) field.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a keypad lock key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
41
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Keypad Lock from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure phone lock type via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Phone Settings->Keypad Lock.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
Keypad Lock Enable field.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired type from the Keypad
Lock Type field.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
To configure a keypad lock key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Keypad Lock from the Key Event
field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
IP phones maintain a local clock and calendar. Time and date display on the idle screen
of the IP phone. Time and date are synced automatically from the NTP server by default.
If IP phones cannot obtain the time and date from the NTP server, you need to manually
configure them. The time and date display can use one of several different formats.
42
Configuring Basic Features
Time Zone
A time zone is a region on Earth that has a uniform standard time. It is convenient for
areas in close commercial or other communication to keep the same time. When
configuring IP phones to obtain the time and date from the NTP server, you must set the
time zone.
Daylight Saving Time
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is the practice of temporary advancing clocks during the
summertime so that evenings have more daylight and mornings have less. Typically
clocks are adjusted forward one hour at the start of spring and backward in autumn.
Many countries have used the DST at various times, details vary by location. The DST
can be adjusted automatically from the time zone configuration. Typically, there is no
need to change this setting.
The following table lists available methods for configuring time and date:
Option
Methods of Configuration
Configuration Files
Time Zone
Web User Interface
Phone User Interface
Time
Web User Interface
Phone User Interface
Configuration Files
Time Format
Web User Interface
Phone User Interface
Date
Web User Interface
Phone User Interface
Configuration Files
Date Format
Web User Interface
Phone User Interface
Daylight Saving Time
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the NTP server, time
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
zone and DST.
Configure the time and date
43
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
formats.
For more information, refer to
Time and Date on page 248.
Configure the NTP server, time
zone and DST.
Configure the time and date
manually.
Web User Interface
Configure the time and date
formats.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
?p=settings-datetime&q=load
Configure the NTP server and
time zone.
Phone User Interface
Configure the time and date
manually.
Configure the time and date
formats.
To configure the NTP server, time zone and DST via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Time & Date.
2.
Select Disabled from the pull-down list of Manual Time.
3.
Select the desired time zone from the pull-down list of Time Zone.
4.
Enter the domain names or IP addresses in the Primary Server and Secondary
Server fields respectively.
5.
Enter the desired time interval in the Synchronism (1~86400s) field.
6.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Daylight Saving Time.
If you select Enabled, do one of the following:
-
Mark the DST By Date radio box in the Fixed Type field.
Enter the start time in the Start Date field.
44
Configuring Basic Features
Enter the end time in the End Date field.
-
Mark the DST By Week radio box in the Fixed Type field.
Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of DST Start Month, DST Start
Day of Week, DST Start Day of Week Last in Month, DST Stop Month, DST Stop
Day of Week and DST Stop Day of Week Last in Month.
Enter the desired time in the Start Hour of Day field.
Enter the desired time in the End Hour of Day field.
7.
Enter the desired offset time in the Offset (minutes) field.
8.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the time and date manually via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Time & Date.
45
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Manual Time.
3.
Enter the time and date in the corresponding fields.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the time and date format via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Time & Date.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Time Format.
3.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Date Format.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the NTP server and time zone via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->SNTP Settings.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the time zone that applies to your
area from the Time Zone field.
46
Configuring Basic Features
The default time zone is "+8 China(Beijing)".
3.
Enter the domain names or IP addresses in the NTP Server 1 and NTP Server 2 fields,
respectively.
4.
Press
or,
or the Switch soft key to select Automatic from the Daylight
Saving field.
5.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
To configure the time and date manually via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->Manual Settings.
2.
Enter the specific time and date.
3.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
To configure the time and date formats via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Basic->Time & Date->Format.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired date format from the
Date Format field.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired time format (12 Hour
or 24 Hour) from the Time Format field.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
IP phones support multiple languages. Languages used on the phone user interface
and web user interface can be specified respectively as required.
The following table lists the languages supported by the phone user interface and the
web user interface respectively.
Phone User Interface
Web User Interface
English
English
Simplified Chinese (not
Simplified Chinese (not
applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)
applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)
Traditional Chinese (not
Traditional Chinese (not
applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)
applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)
French
French
Deutsch
German
Dutch (not applicable to
Italian
SIP-T46G/T42G)
Turkish
Italian
Portuguese
Polish
Spanish
Portuguese
47
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Phone User Interface
Web User Interface
Spanish
Turkish
Not all of the supported languages are available for selection. Languages available for
selection depend on language packs currently loaded on IP phones. You can make
languages available for use on the phone user interface by loading language packs to
the IP phone. Language packs can only be loaded using the configuration files.
The following table lists available languages and the associated language packs:
Available
Associated Language Pack
Associated Language Pack
Language
for SIP-T42G/T41P
for SIP-T46G
English
lang+English.txt
0.GUI.English.lang
Chinese_S
/
1.GUI.Chinese_S.lang
Chinese_T
/
2.GUI.Chinese_T.lang
Deutsch
lang-Deutsch.txt
3.GUI.Deutsch.lang
French
lang-French.txt
4.GUI.French.lang
Italian
lang-Italian.txt
5.GUI.Italian.lang
Polish
lang-Polish.txt
6.GUI.Polish.lang
lang-Portuguese.txt
7.GUI.Portuguese.lang
lang-Spanish.txt
8.GUI.Spanish.lang
Turkish
lang-Turkish.txt
9.GUI.Turkish.lang
Dutch
lang-Dutch.txt (for SIP-T41P)
Portuguese
Spanish
/
To update translation of a built-in language, the file name of the language file cannot be
changed. For more information, refer to Yealink SIP-T4X IP Phones Auto Provisioning
Guide.
Procedure
Loading language pack can only be performed using the configuration files.
Specify the access URL of the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
language pack.
For more information, refer to
Language on page 253.
48
Configuring Basic Features
The default language used on the phone user interface is English. The default language
used on the web user interface depends on the language preferences in the browser (if
the language is not supported by the IP phone, the web user interface uses English). You
can specify the languages for the phone user interface and web user interface.
Procedure
Specify the language for the web user interface or the phone user interface using the
configuration files or locally.
Specify the languages for the
phone user interface and the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
web user interface.
For more information, refer to
Language on page 253.
Specify the language for the web
user interface.
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
?p=settings-preference&q=load
Phone User Interface
Specify the language for the
phone user interface.
To specify the language for the web user interface via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Preference.
2.
Select the desired language from the pull-down list of Language.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
49
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
To specify the language for the phone user interface via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Basic->Language.
2.
Press
3.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
or
to select the desired language.
Logo customization allows unifying the IP phone appearance or displaying a custom
image on the idle screen such as a company logo, instead of the default system logo.
Logo is not applicable to the SIP-T46G and SIP-T42G IP phones. The logo file format must
be .dob, and the resolution of the SIP-T41P IP phone is 192*64 graphic.
Note
Before uploading your custom logo to IP phones, ensure the logo file is correctly
formatted. For more information on customizing a logo file , refer to Yealink SIP-T4X IP
Phones Auto Provisioning Guide.
Procedure
The logo shown on the idle screen can be configured using the configuration files or
locally.
Configure the logo shown on the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
idle screen.
For more information, refer to
Logo Customization on page 255.
Configure the logo shown on the
idle screen.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
To configure a custom logo via web user interface (only for the SIP-T41P IP phone):
1.
50
Click on Features->General Information.
Configuring Basic Features
2.
Select Custom logo from the pull-down list of Use Logo.
3.
Click Browse to select the logo file from your local system.
4.
Click Upload to upload the file.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
The custom logo screen and the idle screen alternately display.
Softkey layout is used to customize the soft keys at the bottom of the LCD screen to best
suit the user needs. It can be configured based on call states. In addition to specifying
which soft keys to display, you can determine their display order. You can create a
template about the softkey layout for the different call states. For more information on
the softkey layout template, refer to Softkey Layout Template on page 213.
The following table lists the soft keys available for IP phones in different states:
Call State
CallFailed
Default Soft Key
Optional Soft Key
NewCall
Empty
Empty
Switch
Empty
Cancel
Empty
CallIn
Answer
Empty
Forward
Switch
Silence
51
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Call State
Default Soft Key
Optional Soft Key
Reject
Connecting
Empty
Empty
Empty
Switch
Empty
Cancel
Connecting
SemiAttendTrans
Transfer
Empty
Empty
Switch
Empty
Cancel
Send
Empty
IME
History
Delete
Directory
Cancel
Switch
Dialing
Line
Directory
GPickup
DPickup
Retrieve
RingBack
Empty
Empty
Empty
Switch
Empty
Cancel
RingBack
SemiAttendTransBack
Transfer
Empty
Empty
Switch
Empty
Cancel
Talking
Talk
Transfer
Empty
HOLD
MUTE
Conference
SWAP
Cancel
NewCall
Switch
Answer
Reject
Hold
52
Transfer
Empty
Configuring Basic Features
Call State
Default Soft Key
Held
Optional Soft Key
Resume
Switch
NewCall
Answer
Cancel
Reject
Empty
Empty
Empty
Switch
Empty
Answer
Cancel
Reject
NewCall
PreTrans
InConference
Transfer
Empty
IME
Directory
Delete
Switch
Cancel
Send
Empty
Empty
Empty
Switch
Empty
Cancel
InConferenceTalk
Empty
Empty
Empty
Switch
Conference
Cancel
Conferenced
Empty
Empty
Hold
Switch
Split
Answer
Cancel
Reject
Mute
Manager
Procedure
Softkey layout can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Specify the access URL of the
softkey layout template.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Access URL of Softkey Layout
Template on page 352.
Local
Web User Interface
Configure the softkey layout.
53
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=settings-softkey&q=load
To configure softkey layout via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Softkey Layout.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Custom Softkey.
3.
Select the desired state from the pull-down list of Call States.
4.
Select the desired soft key from the Unselected Softkeys column and click
.
The selected soft key appears in the Selected Softkeys column. If more than four
soft keys are selected, a More soft key appears on the LCD screen, and the
selected soft keys are displayed in two pages.
5.
Repeat the step 4 to add more soft keys to the Selected Softkeys column.
6.
Click
to remove the soft key from the Selected Softkeys column.
7.
Click
or
8.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
to adjust the display order of the soft key.
Key as send allows assigning the pound key or star key as a send key. Send sound
allows the IP phone to play a key tone when a user presses the send key.
Procedure
Key as send can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the send key.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configure send tone.
For more information, refer to Key
54
Configuring Basic Features
as Send on page 256.
Configure the send key.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
Web User Interface
?p=features-general&q=load
Configure send tone.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-audio&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure the send key.
To configure the send key via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Key As Send.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the send tone via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Audio.
55
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Send Sound.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the send key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Others->General.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select # or * from the Key as Send field,
or select Disabled to disable this feature.
3.
Note
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Send tone works only if key tone is enabled. Key tone is enabled by default.
A hotline is a point-to-point communication link in which a call is automatically directed
to the preset hotline number. The IP phone automatically dials out the hotline number
using the first available line after a time interval when off-hook. IP phones only support
one hotline number.
Procedure
Hotline can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the hotline number.
Specify the time (in seconds) the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
IP phone waits to automatically
dial out the hotline number.
For more information, refer to
Hotline on page 257.
56
Configuring Basic Features
Configure the hotline number.
Specify the time (in seconds) the
IP phone waits to automatically
Web User Interface
dial out the hotline number.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
?p=features-general&q=load
Configure the hotline number.
Phone User Interface
Specify the time (in seconds) the
IP phone waits to automatically
dial out the hotline number.
To configure hotline via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Enter the hotline number in the Hotline Number field.
3.
Enter the delay time in the Hotline Delay (0~10s) field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure hotline via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Others->Hotline.
2.
Enter the hotline number in the Number field.
3.
Enter the delay time in the Hotline Delay 0-10(s) field.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
57
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Call log contains call information such as remote party identification, time and date,
and call duration. IP phones maintain a local call log. Call log consists of four lists:
Missed calls, Placed calls, Received calls and Forwarded calls. Each call log list
supports up to 100 entries. To store call information, you must enable the save call log
feature in advance.
Procedure
Call log can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the call log.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to Call
Log on page 258.
Configure the call log.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure the call log.
To configure the call log via web user interface:
58
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Save Call Calllog.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Basic Features
To configure the call log via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Others->General.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the History
Record field.
3.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Missed call log allows IP phones to display the number of the missed calls with an
indicator icon on the idle screen, and to log the missed calls in the missed calls list when
IP phones miss calls. It is configurable on a per-line basis. Once the user accesses the
Missed calls list, the prompt message and an indicator icon on the idle screen are
cleared.
Procedure
Missed call log can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the missed call log
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
feature.
For more information, refer to
Missed Call Log on page 258.
Configure the missed call log
feature.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-basic&q=load&acc
=0
To configure missed call log via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Basic.
59
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Missed Call Log.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
The IP phone maintains a local directory. The local directory can store up to 1000
contacts and 50 groups (including the default groups: All Contacts, Company, Family,
Friend and Blacklist). When adding a contact to the local directory, in addition to name
and phone numbers, you can also specify the account, ring tone and group for the
contact. Contacts and groups can be added either one by one or in batch using a
contact file. For more information on the contact file, refer to Local Contact File on page
215.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Specify the access URL of the
local contact file.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Access URL of Local Contact File
on page 354.
Add a new group and a contact
to the local directory.
Web User Interface
Local
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=contactsbasic&q=load&num
=1&group=
Phone User Interface
60
Add a new group and a contact
to the local directory.
Configuring Basic Features
To add a new group to the local directory via web user interface:
1.
Click on Directory->Local Directory.
2.
In the Group Setting block, enter the new group name in the Group field.
3.
Select the desired group ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring.
4.
Click Add to add the new group.
To add a contact to the local directory via web user interface:
1.
Click on Directory->Local Directory.
2.
Enter the name and the office, mobile or other numbers in the corresponding fields.
3.
Select the desired ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring Tone.
4.
Select the desired group from the pull-down list of Group.
5.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
6.
Select the desired photo from the pull-down list of Photo.
61
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
It is not applicable to SIP-T42G and SIP-T41P IP phones.
7.
Click Add to add the contact.
To add a group to the local directory via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Directory->Local Group.
2.
Press the Add Group soft key.
3.
Enter the desired group name in the Group Name field.
4.
Press
5.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change or the Back soft key to cancel.
or
to select the desired group ring tone from the Ring Tones field.
To add a contact to the local directory via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Directory->Local Group.
2.
Select the desired contact group and press the Enter soft key.
3.
Press the Add soft key.
4.
Enter the name and the office, mobile or other numbers in the corresponding fields.
5.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired account from the
Account field.
If Auto is selected, the IP phone will use the first available account when placing
calls to the contact from the local directory.
6.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired ring tone from the Ring
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired photo from the Photo
field.
7.
Press
field.
8.
62
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Configuring Basic Features
Live dialpad allows IP phones to automatically dial out the entered phone number after
a specified period of time.
Procedure
Live dialpad can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure live dialpad.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to Live
Dialpad on page 259.
Configure live dialpad.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=settings-preference&q=load
To configure live dialpad via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Preference.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Live Dialpad.
3.
Enter the desired delay time in the Inter Digit Time (1~14s) field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Call waiting allows IP phones to receive a new call when there is already an active call.
The new call is presented to the user visually on the LCD screen. Call waiting tone
allows the phone to play a short tone, to remind the user audibly of a new incoming call
63
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
during conversation. Call waiting tone works only if call waiting is enabled.
The call waiting on code and call waiting off code configured on IP phones are used to
activate/deactivate the server-side call waiting feature. They may vary on different
servers.
Procedure
Call waiting and call waiting tone can be configured using the configuration files or
locally.
Configure call waiting.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to Call
Waiting on page 259.
Configure call waiting.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure call waiting.
To configure call waiting via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Waiting.
3.
(Optional.) Enter the call waiting on code in the Call Waiting On Code field.
4.
(Optional.) Enter the call waiting off code in the Call Waiting Off Code field.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the call waiting tone via web user interface:
1.
64
Click on Features->Audio.
Configuring Basic Features
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Waiting Tone.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure call waiting and call waiting tone via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Call Waiting.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Call
Waiting field.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Play
Tone field.
4.
(Optional.) Enter the call waiting on code in the On Code field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the call waiting off code in the Off Code field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Auto redial allows IP phones to redial a busy number after the first attempt. Both the
number of attempts and waiting time between redials are configurable.
Procedure
Auto redial can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure auto redial.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Auto Redial on page 260.
Configure auto redial.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
65
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
?p=features-general&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure auto redial.
To configure auto redial via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Redial.
3.
Enter the desired time interval (in seconds) in the Auto Redial Interval (1~300s)
field.
The default time interval is 10s.
4.
Enter the desired times in the Auto Redial Times (1~300) field.
The default times are 10.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure auto redial via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Others->Auto Redial.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Auto
Redial field.
3.
Enter the desired time in the Redial Interval field.
4.
Enter the desired times in the Redial Times field.
5.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Auto answer allows IP phones to automatically answer an incoming call. IP phones will
not automatically answer the incoming call during a call even if auto answer is enabled.
Auto answer is configurable on a per-line basis. You can specify a period of delay time
66
Configuring Basic Features
for the IP phone to automatically answer a call.
Procedure
Auto answer can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure auto answer.
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Auto Answer on page 262.
Configuration File
Specify a period of delay time for
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
auto answer.
For more information, refer to
Auto Answer on page 262.
Configure auto answer.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-basic&q=load&acc
Local
Web User Interface
=0
Specify a period of delay time for
auto answer.
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure auto answer.
To configure auto answer via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Basic.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Answer.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
67
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
To configure a period of delay time for auto answer via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Enter the desired time (in seconds) in the Auto-Answer Delay(1~4s) field.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure auto answer via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Auto Answer.
2.
Select the desired line and then press the Enter soft key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Auto
Answer field.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Call completion allows users to monitor the busy party and establish a call when the
busy party becomes available to receive a call. Two factors commonly prevent a call
from connecting successfully:

Callee does not answer

Callee actively rejects the incoming call before answering
IP phones support call completion using the SUBSCRIBE/NOTIFY method, which is
specified in draft-poetzl-sipping-call-completion-00, to subscribe to the busy party and
receive notifications of their status changes. Call completion is not applicable to
SIP-T42G and SIP-T41P IP phones.
68
Configuring Basic Features
Procedure
Call completion can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure call completion.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to Call
Completion on page 263.
Configure call completion.
Web User Interface
Local
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure call completion.
To configure call completion via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Completion.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure call completion via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Others->Call Completion.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Call
Completion field.
3.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Anonymous call allows the caller to conceal the identity from the callee when placing a
call. The callee’s phone LCD screen prompts an incoming call from anonymity.
69
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Example of anonymous SIP header:
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.2.8.183:5063;branch=z9hG4bK1535948896
From: "Anonymous" <sip:anonymous@anonymous.invalid>;tag=128043702
To: <sip:1011@10.2.1.199>
Call-ID: 1773251036@10.2.8.183
CSeq: 1 INVITE
Contact: <sip:1012@10.2.8.183:5063>
Content-Type: application/sdp
Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER,
PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE
Max-Forwards: 70
User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.71.0.10
Privacy: id
Supported: replaces
Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync
P-Preferred-Identity: <sip:1012@10.2.1.199>
Content-Length: 302
The anonymous call on code and anonymous call off code configured on IP phones are
used to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call feature. They may vary on
different servers.
Procedure
Anonymous call can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure anonymous call.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Anonymous Call on page 264.
Configure anonymous call.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-basic&q=load&acc
=0
Phone User Interface
Configure anonymous call.
To configure the anonymous call via web user interface:
70
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Basic.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Anonymous Call.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the anonymous call on code in the On Code field.
Configuring Basic Features
6.
(Optional.) Enter the anonymous call off code in the Off Code field.
7.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the anonymous call via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Anonymous.
2.
Select the desired line and then press Enter soft key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Send
Anonymous field.
4.
(Optional.) Enter the anonymous call on code in the On Code field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the anonymous call off code in the Off Code field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Anonymous call rejection allows IP phones to automatically reject incoming calls from
callers whose identity has been deliberately concealed. The anonymous caller’s LCD
screen presents “Anonymity Disallowed”.
The anonymous call rejection on code and anonymous call rejection off code
configured on IP phones are used to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call
rejection feature. They may vary on different servers.
Procedure
Anonymous call rejection can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure anonymous call
rejection.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Anonymous Call Rejection on
page 265.
71
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Configure anonymous call
rejection.
Web User Interface
Local
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-basic&q=load&acc
=0
Phone User Interface
Configure anonymous call
rejection.
To configure anonymous call rejection via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Basic.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Anonymous Call Rejection.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the anonymous call rejection on code in the On Code field.
6.
(Optional.) Enter the anonymous call rejection off code in the Off Code field.
7.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure anonymous call rejection via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Anonymous.
2.
Select the desired line and then press Enter soft key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
Anonymous Rejection field.
72
4.
(Optional.) Enter the anonymous call rejection on code in the On Code field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the anonymous call rejection off code in the Off Code field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Configuring Basic Features
Do Not Disturb (DND) allows IP phones to ignore incoming calls. DND can be configured
on a phone or per-line basis depending on the DND mode. Two DND modes:

Phone (default): DND feature is effective for all accounts on the IP phone.

Custom: DND feature can be configured for each or all accounts.
A user can activate or deactivate DND using the DND soft key or DND key. DND
activated on IP phones disables the local call forward settings. The DND configurations
on IP phones may be overridden by the server settings.
The DND on code and DND off code configured on IP phones are used to
activate/deactivate the server-side DND feature. They may vary on different servers.
Return Message When DND
This feature defines the return code and the reason of the SIP response message for the
rejected incoming call when DND is enabled on IP phones. The caller’s LCD screen
displays the received reason.
Procedure
DND can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure DND in the custom
<MAC>.cfg
mode.
For more information, refer to Do
Not Disturb on page 266.
Assign a DND key.
For more information, refer to DND
Key on page 362.
Configuration File
Configure the DND mode.
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configure DND in the phone
mode.
Specify return code and reason of
the SIP response message.
For more information, refer to Do
Not Disturb on page 266.
Assign a DND key.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?
p=dsskey&model=1&q=load&line
page=1
73
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Configure DND.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?
p=features-forward&q=load
Specify return code and reason of
the SIP response message.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?
p=features-general&q=load
Phone User Interface
Assign a DND key.
Configure DND.
To configure a DND key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select DND from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the DND feature via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Forward & DND.
2.
In the DND block, mark the desired radio box in the Mode field.
a) If you mark the Phone radio box:
1) Mark the desired radio box in the DND Status field.
2) (Optional.) Enter the DND on code in the DND On Code field.
74
Configuring Basic Features
3) (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the DND Off Code field.
b) If you mark the Custom radio box:
1) Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
2) Mark the desired value in the DND Status field.
3) (Optional.) Enter the DND on code in the DND On Code field.
4) (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the DND Off Code field.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
75
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
To specify the return code via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired type from the pull-down list of Return Code When DND.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a DND key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select DND from the Key Event field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
To configure DND in the phone mode via phone user interface:
1.
Press the DND soft key or the DND key when the IP phone is idle.
To configure DND in the custom mode for a specific account via phone user interface:
1.
Press the DND soft key or the DND key when the IP phone is idle.
The LCD screen displays a list of the accounts registered on the IP phone.
2.
Press
or
to select the desired account.
3.
Press
or
soft key to select On to activate DND.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
To configure DND in the custom mode for all accounts via phone user interface:
1.
Press the DND soft key or the DND key when the IP phone is idle.
The LCD screen displays a list of the accounts registered on the IP phone.
76
Configuring Basic Features
2.
Press the All On soft key to activate DND for all accounts.
3.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Busy tone is audible to the other party, indicating that the call connection has been
broken when one party releases a call. Busy tone delay can define a period of time
during which the busy tone is audible.
Procedure
Busy tone delay can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the busy tone delay
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
feature.
For more information, refer to
Busy Tone Delay on page 261.
Configure the busy tone delay
feature.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
To configure busy tone delay via web user interface:
1. Click on Features->General Information.
2. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Busy Tone Delay (Seconds).
3. Click Confirm to accept the change.
77
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Return code when refuse defines the return code and reason of the SIP response
message for call rejection. The caller’s LCD screen displays the reason according to the
return code received. Available return codes and reasons are:

404 (Not found)

480 (Temporarily not available)

486 (Busy here)
Procedure
Return code for call rejection can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the return code when
refusing a call.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Return Code When Refuse on
page 270.
Configure the return code when
refusing a call.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
To specify the return code when refusing a call via web user interface:
78
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Return Code When Refuse.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Basic Features
Early media refers to media (e.g., audio and video) played to the caller before a SIP
call is actually established. Current implementation supports early media through the
183 message. When the caller receives a 183 message with SDP before the call is
established, a media channel is established. This channel is used to provide the early
media stream to the caller.
180 ring workaround defines whether to deal with the 180 message received after the
183 message. When the caller receives a 183 message, it suppresses any local ringback
tone and begins to play the media received. 180 ring workaround allows IP phones to
resume and play the local ringback tone upon a subsequent 180 message received.
Procedure
180 ring workaround can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure 180 ring workaround.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to 180
Ring Workaround on page 270.
Configure 180 ring workaround.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
To configure 180 ring workaround via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
79
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of 180 Ring Workaround.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
An outbound proxy server can receive all initiating request messages and route them to
the designated destination. If the IP phone is configured to use an outbound proxy
server within a dialog, all SIP request messages from the IP phone will be sent to the
outbound proxy server forcefully.
Note
To use this feature, make sure the outbound proxy server is configured on the IP phone in
advance.
Procedure
Use outbound proxy in dialog can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Specify whether to use outbound
proxy in a dialog.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to Use
Outbound Proxy in Dialog on
page 271.
Specify whether to use outbound
Local
Web User Interface
proxy in a dialog.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
80
Configuring Basic Features
?p=features-general&q=load
To specify whether to use outbound proxy server in a dialog via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
SIP session timers T1, T2 and T4 are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261.
Timer T1 is an estimate of the Round Trip Time (RTT) of transactions between a SIP client
and SIP server. Timer T2 represents the maximum retransmitting time of any SIP request
message. The re-transmitting and doubling of T1 will continue until the retransmitting
time reaches the T2 value. Timer T4 represents the time the network will take to clear
messages between the SIP client and server. These session timers are configurable on IP
phones.
Procedure
SIP session timer can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure SIP session timer.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to SIP
Session Timer on page 271.
Configure SIP session timer.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
81
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
?p=account-adv&q=load&acc=
0
To configure session timer via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Enter the desired value in the SIP Session Timer T1 (0.5~10s) field.
The default value is 0.5s.
5.
Enter the desired value in the SIP Session Timer T2 (2~40s) field.
The default value is 4s.
6.
Enter the desired value in the SIP Session Timer T4 (2.5~60s) field.
The default value is 5s.
7.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Session timer allows for a periodic refresh of SIP sessions through a re-INVITE request, to
determine whether a SIP session is still active. Session timer is specified in RFC 4028. IP
phones support two refresher modes: UAC and UAS. The UAC mode means refreshing
the session from the client, while the UAS mode means refreshing the session from the
server. The session expiration and session refresher are negotiated via the
Session-Expires header in the INVITE message. The negotiated refresher will send a
re-INVITE request at or before the negotiated session expiration.
82
Configuring Basic Features
Procedure
Session timer can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure session timer.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Session Timer on page 272.
Configure session timer.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-adv&q=load&acc=
0
To configure session timer via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Session Timer.
5.
Enter the desired time interval in the Session Expires (30~7200s) field.
6.
Select the desired refresher from the pull-down list of Session Refresher.
7.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
83
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Call hold provides a service of putting an active call on hold. When a call is placed on
hold, the IP phone sends an INVITE request with a HOLD SDP to the server. IP phones
support two call hold methods, one is RFC 3264, which sets the “a” (media attribute) in
the SDP to sendonly, recvonly or inactive (e.g., a=sendonly). The other is RFC 2543,
which sets the “c” (connection addresses for the media streams) in the SDP to zero (e.g.,
c=0.0.0.0). The call hold tone feature allows IP phones to play a hold tone at regular
intervals when there is a call on hold.
Procedure
Call hold can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the call hold tone and
call hold tone delay.
Specify whether RFC 2543
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
(c=0.0.0.0) outgoing hold
signaling is used.
For more information, refer to Call
Hold on page 274.
Configure the call hold tone and
call hold tone delay.
Specify whether RFC 2543
Local
Web User Interface
(c=0.0.0.0) outgoing hold
signaling is used.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
To configure call hold method via web user interface:
1.
84
Click on Features->General Information.
Configuring Basic Features
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of RFC 2543 Hold.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure call hold tone and call hold tone delay via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Play Hold Tone.
3.
Enter the desired time in the Play Hold Tone Delay field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
85
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Call forward allows users to redirect an incoming call to a third party. IP phones redirect
an incoming INVITE message by responding with a 302 Moved Temporarily message,
which contains a Contact header with a new URI that should be tried. Three types of call
forward:

Always Forward -- Forward the incoming calls immediately.

Busy Forward -- Forward the incoming call when the callee is busy.

No Answer Forward -- Forward the incoming call after a period of ring time.
Call forward can be configured on a phone or per-line depending on the call forward
mode. The following describes the call forward modes:

Phone (default): Call forward feature is effective for all accounts on the IP phone.

Custom: Call forward feature can be configured for each or all accounts.
The call forward on code and call forward off code configured on IP phones are used to
activate/deactivate the server-side call forward feature. They may vary on different
servers.
Forward International
Forward international allows users to forward an incoming call to an international
telephone number. This feature is enabled by default.
Procedure
Call forward can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure call forward in
<MAC>.cfg
custom mode.
For more information, refer to
Call Forward on page 275.
Configure the call forward
mode.
Configuration File
Configure call forward in
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
phone mode.
Configure forward
international.
For more information, refer to
Call Forward on page 275.
Configure call forward.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/ser
86
Configuring Basic Features
vlet?p=features-forward&q=l
oad
Configure forward
international.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/
servlet?p=features-general&
q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure call forward.
To configure call forward via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Forward & DND.
2.
In the Forward block, mark the desired radio box in the Mode field.
a) If you mark the Phone radio box:
1) Mark the desired radio box in the Always Forward/Busy Forward/No Answer
Forward field.
2) Enter the destination number you want to forward in the Target field.
3) (Optional.) Enter the on code and off code in the On Code and Off Code
fields.
4) Select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the pull-down list of After
Ring Times (only for the no answer forward).
b) If you mark the Custom radio box:
1) Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
2) Mark the desired radio box in the Always Forward/Busy Forward/No Answer
Forward field.
2) Enter the destination number you want to forward in the Target field.
87
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
3) (Optional.) Enter the on code and off code in the On Code and Off Code
fields.
4) Select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the pull-down list of After
Ring Times (only for no answer forward).
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the forward international feature via web user interface:
88
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Fwd International.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Basic Features
To configure call forward in phone mode via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Call Forward.
2.
Press
or
to select the desired forwarding type, and then press the Enter
soft key.
3.
Depending on your selection:
a) If you select Always Forward:
1) Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
Always Forward field.
2) Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to in the
Forward To field.
3) (Optional.) Enter the always forward on code and off code respectively in the
On Code and Off Code fields.
b) If you select Busy Forward:
1) Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
Busy Forward field.
2) Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to when
the IP phone is busy in the Forward To field.
3) (Optional.) Enter the busy forward on code and off code respectively in the
On Code and Off Code fields.
c) If you select No Answer Forward:
1) Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
No Answer Forward field.
2) Enter the destination number you want to forward all unanswered incoming
calls to in the Forward To field.
3) Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before
forwarding from the After Ring Time field.
The default ring time is 12 seconds.
4) (Optional.) Enter the no answer forward on code and off code respectively in
the On Code and Off Code fields.
4.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
To configure call forward in custom mode via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Call Forward.
2.
Press
or
to select the desired account, and then press the Enter soft key.
3.
Press
or
to select the desired forwarding type, and then press the Enter
soft key.
4.
Depending on your selection:
a) If you select Always Forward, you can configure it for a specific account.
1) Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
89
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Always Forward field.
2) Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to in the
Forward To field.
3) (Optional.) Enter the always forward on code and off code respectively in the
On Code and Off Code fields.
You can also configure the always forward for all accounts. After the always
forward was configured for a specific account, do the following:
1) Press
or
to highlight the Always Forward field.
2) Press the All Lines soft key.
The LCD screen prompts “Copy to all lines?”.
3) Press the OK soft key to accept the change.
b) If you select Busy Forward, you can configure it for a specific account.
1) Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
Busy Forward field.
2) Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to when
the IP phone is busy in the Forward To field.
3) (Optional.) Enter the busy forward on code and off code respectively in the
On Code and Off Code fields.
You can also configure the busy forward for all accounts. After the busy forward
was configured for a specific account, do the following:
1) Press
or
to highlight the Busy Forward field.
2) Press the All Lines soft key.
The LCD screen prompts “Copy to all lines?”.
3) Press the OK soft key to accept the change.
c) If you select No Answer Forward, you can configure it for a specific account.
1) Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the
No Answer Forward field.
2) Enter the destination number you want to forward all unanswered incoming
calls to in the Forward To field.
3) Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before
forwarding from the After Ring Time field
The default ring time is 12 seconds.
4) (Optional.) Enter the no answer forward on code and off code respectively in
the On Code and Off Code fields.
You can also configure the no answer forward for all accounts. After the no answer
forward was configured for a specific account, do the following:
1) Press
or
to highlight the No Answer Forward field.
2) Press the All Lines soft key.
The LCD screen prompts “Copy to all lines?”.
90
Configuring Basic Features
3) Press the OK soft key to accept the change.
5.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Call transfer enables IP phones to transfer an existing call to another party. IP phones
support call transfer using the REFER method specified in RFC 3515 and offer three types
of transfer:

Blind Transfer -- Transfer a call directly to another party without consulting. Blind
transfer is implemented by a simple REFER method without Replaces in the Refer-To
header.

Semi-attended Transfer -- Transfer a call after hearing the ringback tone.
Semi-attended transfer is implemented by a REFER method with Replaces in the
Refer-To header.

Attended Transfer -- Transfer a call with prior consulting. Attended transfer is
implemented by a REFER method with Replaces in the Refer-To header.
Normally, call transfer is completed by pressing the transfer key. The blind transfer on
hook and attended transfer on hook features allow the IP phone to complete the
transfer through on-hook.
When a user performs a semi-attended transfer, semi-attended transfer determines
whether to display the prompt “1 New Missed Call(s)” on the destination party’s LCD
screen.
Procedure
Call transfer can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Specify whether to complete the
transfer through on-hook.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configure the semi-attended
transfer feature.
For more information, refer to Call
Transfer on page 284.
Specify whether to complete the
transfer through on-hook.
Configure the semi-attended
Local
Web User Interface
transfer feature.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-transfer&q=load
91
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
To configure call transfer via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Transfer.
2.
Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of Semi-Attend Transfer, Blind
Transfer On Hook and Semi Attend Transfer On Hook.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Network conference, also known as centralized conference, provides users with
flexibility of call with multiple participants (more than three). IP phones implement
network conference using the REFER method specified in RFC 4579. This feature
depends on support from a SIP server.
Procedure
Network conference can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure network conference.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Network Conference on page
285.
Configure network conference.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-adv&q=load&acc=
0
92
Configuring Basic Features
To configure the network conference via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Select Network from the pull-down list of Conference Type.
5.
Enter the conference URI in the Conference URI field.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
For local conference, all parties drop the call when the conference initiator drops the
conference call. Transfer on conference hang up allows the other two parties remain
connected when the conference initiator drops the conference call.
Procedure
Transfer on conference hang up feature can be configured using the configuration files
or locally.
Configure transfer on conference
hang up.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Transfer on Conference Hang Up
on page 286.
Local
Web User Interface
Configure transfer on conference
93
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
hang up.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-transfer&q=load
To configure Transfer on Conference Hang up via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Transfer.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Transfer on Conference Hang up.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Directed call pickup is used for picking up an incoming call on a specific extension. A
user can pick up the incoming call using a directed pickup key or the DPickup soft key.
This feature depends on support from a SIP server. For many SIP servers, directed call
pickup requires a directed pickup code, which can be configured on a phone or per-line
basis.
Note
It is recommended not to configure the directed call pickup key and the DPickup soft key
simultaneously. If you do, the directed call pickup key will not be used correctly.
Procedure
Directed call pickup can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the directed call
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
pickup code on a per-line basis.
For more information, refer to
94
Configuring Basic Features
Directed Call Pickup on page
288.
Assign a directed call pickup
key.
For more information, refer to
Directed Call Pickup Key on
page 362.
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configure the directed call
pickup feature on a phone
basis.
For more information, refer to
Directed Call Pickup on page
287.
Assign a directed call pickup
key.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=dsskey&model=1&q=loa
d&linepage=1
Configure the directed call
pickup feature on a phone
basis.
Web User Interface
Local
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-callpickup&q=lo
ad
Configure the directed call
pickup code on a per-line basis.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-adv&q=load&ac
c=0
Phone User Interface
Assign a directed call pickup
key.
To configure a directed call pickup key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Directed Pickup from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Enter the directed call pickup code followed by the specific extension in the Value
field.
95
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
4.
Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the directed call pickup feature on a phone basis via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Call Pickup.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Directed Call Pickup.
3.
Enter the directed call pickup code in the Directed Call Pickup Code field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the directed call pickup code on a per-line basis via web user interface:
96
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
Configuring Basic Features
4.
Enter the directed call pickup code in the Directed Call Pickup Code field.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a directed pickup key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Directed Pickup from the Key
Event field.
5.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account
ID field.
6.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
7.
Enter the directed call pickup code followed by the specific extension in the Value
field.
8.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Group call pickup is used for picking up incoming calls within a pre-defined group. If the
group receives many incoming calls at once, the user will pick up the first incoming call,
using a group pickup key or the GPickup soft key. This feature depends on support from
a SIP server. For many SIP servers, group call pickup requires a group pickup code,
which can be configured on a phone or per-line basis.
97
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Procedure
Group call pickup can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the group call pickup
<MAC>.cfg
code on a per-line basis.
For more information, refer to
Group Call Pickup on page 289.
Assign a group call pickup key.
For more information, refer to
Configuration File
Group Call Pickup Key on page
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
363.
Configure the group call pickup
feature on a phone basis.
For more information, refer to
Group Call Pickup on page 288.
Assign a group call pickup key.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=dsskey&model=1&q=loa
d&linepage=1
Configure the group call pickup
feature on a phone basis.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-callpickup&q=lo
ad
Configure the group call pickup
code on a per-line basis.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-adv&q=load&ac
c=0
Phone User Interface
Assign a group call pickup key.
To configure a group call pickup key via web user interface:
98
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Group Pickup from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Enter the group call pickup code in the Value field.
Configuring Basic Features
4.
Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the group call pickup feature on a phone basis via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Call Pickup.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Group Call Pickup.
3.
Enter the group call pickup code in the Group Call Pickup Code field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the group call pickup code on a per-line basis via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
99
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
4.
Enter the group call pickup code in the Group Call Pickup Code field.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a group pickup key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Group Pickup from the Key Event
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account
field.
5.
Press
ID field.
6.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
7.
Enter the group call pickup code in the Value field.
8.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Call pickup is implemented through SIP signals on some specific servers. IP phones can
pick up incoming calls via a NOTIFY message with dialog-info event. A user can pick up
an incoming call by pressing a DSS key used to monitor a specific extension (such as a
BLF key).
100
Configuring Basic Features
Example of the dialog-info message carried in NOTIFY message:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<dialog-info xmlns="urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:dialog-info" version="6" state="full"
entity="sip:1013@10.2.1.199">
<dialog id="706655206@10.2.8.213" call-id="706655206@10.2.8.213" local-tag="827932784"
remote-tag="1887460740" direction="recipient">
<state>early</state>
<local>
<identity>sip:1013@10.2.1.199</identity>
<target uri="sip:1013@10.2.1.199">
</target>
</local>
<remote>
<identity>sip:1011@10.2.1.199</identity>
<target uri="sip:1011@10.2.8.213:5063">
</target>
</remote>
</dialog>
</dialog-info>
Procedure
Dialog-info call pickup can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure dialog-info call
pickup on the IP phone.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Dialog-Info Call Pickup on page
289.
Configure dialog-info call
pickup on the IP phone.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-adv&q=load&ac
c=0
To configure dialog-info call pickup via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
101
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Dialog Info Call Pickup.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Call return, also known as last call return, allows users to place a call back to the last
caller. Call return is implemented on IP phones using a call return key.
Procedure
Call return key can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Assign a call return key.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to Call
Return Key on page 364.
Assign a call return key.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=dsskey&model=1&q=load&li
nepage=1
Phone User Interface
Assign a call return key.
To configure a call return key via web user interface:
1.
102
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
Configuring Basic Features
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Call Return from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a call return key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Call Return from the Key Event
field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Call park allows users to park a call on a special extension and then retrieve it on any
other phone in the system. Users can park calls on the extension, known as call park
orbit, by pressing a call park key. The current call is put on hold and can be retrieved on
another IP phone. This feature depends on support from a SIP server.
Procedure
Call park key can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Assign a call park key.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Call Park Key on page 365.
Assign a call park key.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=dsskey&model=1&q=loa
103
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
d&linepage=1
Phone User Interface
Assign a call park key.
To configure a call park key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Call Park from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Enter the desired value (e.g., call park feature code) in the Value field.
4.
Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a call park key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Call Park from the Key Event field.
5.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account
ID field.
6.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
7.
Enter the desired value (e.g., call park feature code) in the Value field.
8.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Web server type determines access permission of the IP phone’s web user interface. IP
phones support both HTTP and HTTPS protocols for accessing the web user interface.
HTTP is an application protocol that runs on top of the TCP/IP suite of protocols. HTTPS is
a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as the pages
returned by the web server. Both the HTTP and HTTPS port numbers are configurable.
104
Configuring Basic Features
Procedure
Web server type can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Specify the web access type,
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
HTTP port and HTTPS port.
For more information, refer to
Web Server Type on page 290.
Specify the web access type,
HTTP port and HTTPS port.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=network-adv&q=load
Phone User Interface
Specify the web access type.
To configure the web server type via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
In the Web Server block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of HTTP.
3.
Enter the HTTP port in the HTTP Port (1~65535) field.
The default HTTP port is 80.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of HTTPS.
5.
Enter the HTTPS port in the HTTPS Port (1~65535) field.
The default HTTPS port is 443.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
105
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after reboot.
7.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure the web server type via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->Webserver Type.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value in the HTTP
Status field.
3.
Enter the HTTP port in the HTTP Port field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired icon in the HTTPS
Status field.
5.
Enter the HTTPS port in the HTTPS Port field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
The IP phone reboots automatically to make the settings effective after a period of
time.
Calling line identification presentation (CLIP) allows IP phones to display the caller
identity, derived from a SIP header contained in the INVITE message when receiving an
incoming call. IP phones support deriving caller identity from three types of SIP header:
From, P-Asserted-Identity and Remote-Party-ID. Identity presentation is based on the
identity in the relevant SIP header.
If the caller has existed in the local directory, the local name assigned to the caller
should be preferentially displayed.
Procedure
CLIP can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the presentation of
the caller identity.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Calling Line Identification
Presentation on page 291.
Configure the presentation of
the caller identity.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-adv&q=load&ac
c=0
106
Configuring Basic Features
To configure the presentation of the caller identity via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of the Caller ID Source.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Connected line identification presentation (COLP) allows IP phones to display the
identity of the callee specified for outgoing calls. The IP phone can display the Dialed
Digits, or the identity in a SIP header (Remote-Party-ID or P-Asserted-Identity) received,
or the identity in the From header carried in the UPDATE message sent by the callee as
described in RFC 4916.
If the callee has existed in the directory, the local name assigned to the callee should be
preferentially displayed.
Procedure
COLP can be configured only using the configuration files.
Configure the presentation of
the callee identity.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Connected Line Identification
Presentation on page 292.
107
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-frequency), better known as touch-tone, is used for
telecommunication signaling over analog telephone lines in the voice-frequency band.
DTMF is the signal sent from the IP phone to the network, which is generated when
pressing the IP phone’s keypad during a call. Each key press on the IP phone generates
one sinusoidal tone of two frequencies. One is generated from a high frequency group
and the other from a low frequency group.
The DTMF keypad is laid out in a 4× 4 matrix, with each row representing a low
frequency, and each column representing a high frequency. Pressing a digit key (such
as '1') will generate a sinusoidal tone for each of two frequencies (697 and 1209 hertz
(Hz)).
DTMF Keypad Frequencies:
1209 Hz
1336 Hz
1447 Hz
1633 Hz
697 Hz
1
2
3
A
770 Hz
4
5
6
B
852 Hz
7
8
9
C
941 Hz
*
0
#
D
Three methods of transmitting DTMF digits on SIP calls:

RFC 2833 --DTMF digits are transmitted by RTP Events compliant to RFC 2833.

INBAND -- DTMF digits are transmitted in the voice band.

SIP INFO -- DTMF digits are transmitted by the SIP INFO messages.
The method of transmitting DTMF digits is configurable on a per-line basis.
RFC 2833
DTMF digits are transmitted using the RTP Event packets that are sent along with the
voice path. These packets use RFC 2833 format and must have a payload type that
matches what the other end is listening for. The payload type for the RTP Event packets
is configurable. IP phones default to 101 for the payload type, which use the definition to
negotiate with the other end during call establishment.
The RTP Event packet contains 4 bytes. The 4 bytes are distributed over several fields
denoted as Event, End bit, R-bit, Volume and Duration. If the End bit is set to 1, the
packet contains the end of the DTMF event. You can configure the number of times the IP
phone sends the RTP Event packet with End bit set to 1.
INBAND
DTMF digits are transmitted within the audio of the IP phone conversation. It uses the
108
Configuring Basic Features
same VoIP codec as your voice and is audible to the conversation partners.
SIP INFO
DTMF digits are transmitted by the SIP INFO messages when the voice stream is
established after a successful SIP 200 OK-ACK message sequence. The SIP INFO
message is sent along the signaling path of the call. The SIP INFO message can transmit
DTMF digits in three ways: DTMF, DTMF-Relay and Telephone-Event.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the method of
transmitting DTMF digit and the
<MAC>.cfg
payload type.
For more information, refer to
DTMF on page 293.
Configuration File
Configure the number of times
for the IP phone to send the end
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
RTP Event packet.
For more information, refer to
DTMF on page 293.
Configure the method of
transmitting DTMF digits and
the payload type.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-adv&q=load&ac
Local
Web User Interface
c=0
Configure the number of times
for the IP phone to send the end
RTP Event packet.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-general&q=loa
d
To configure the method of transmitting DTMF digits via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DTMF Type.
109
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
If SIP INFO or AUTO or SIP INFO is selected, select the desired value from the
pull-down list of DTMF Info Type.
5.
Enter the desired value in the DTMF Payload Type (96~127) field.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the number of times to send the end RTP Event packet via web user
interface:
110
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value (1-3) from the pull-down list of DTMF Repetition.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Basic Features
Suppress DTMF display allows IP phones to suppress the display of DTMF digits. The
DTMF digits are displayed as “*” on the LCD screen. Suppress DTMF display delay
defines whether to display the DTMF digits for a short period of time before displaying
as “*”.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure suppress DTMF
display and suppress DTMF
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
display delay.
For more information, refer to
Suppress DTMF Display on
page 294.
Configure suppress DTMF
display and suppress DTMF
display delay.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-general&q=loa
d
To configure suppress DTMF display and suppress DTMF display delay via web user
interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Suppress DTMF Display.
111
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
3.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Suppress DTMF Display Delay.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Call transfer is implemented via DTMF on some traditional servers. The IP phone sends
specified DTMF digits to the server for transferring calls to a third party.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure transfer via DTMF.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Transfer via DTMF on page 295.
Configure transfer via DTMF.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-general&q=loa
d
To configure the transfer via DTMF feature via web user interface:
112
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DTMF Replace Tran.
Configuring Basic Features
3.
Enter the specified DTMF digits in the Tran Send DTMF field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Intercom allows establishing an audio conversation directly. The IP phone can answer
intercom calls automatically. This feature depends on support from a SIP server.
Intercom is a useful feature in office environments to quickly connect with an operator or
secretary. Users can press an intercom key to automatically initiate an outgoing
intercom call with a remote extension.
Procedure
Intercom key can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Assign an intercom key.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Intercom Key on page 365.
Assign an intercom key.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=dsskey&model=1&q=load&li
113
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
nepage=1
Phone User Interface
Assign an intercom key.
To configure an intercom key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Intercom from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Enter the remote extension number in the Value field.
4.
Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure an intercom key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
4.
Select the desired line from the Account ID field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Enter the remote extension number in the Value field.
7.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Intercom from the Type field.
The IP phone can process incoming calls differently depending on settings. Four
configuration options for incoming intercom calls.
Accept Intercom
Accept Intercom allows the IP phone to automatically answer an incoming intercom call.
114
Configuring Basic Features
Intercom Mute
Intercom Mute allows the IP phone to mute the microphone for incoming intercom calls.
Intercom Tone
Intercom Tone allows the IP phone to play a warning tone before answering an intercom
call.
Intercom Barge
Intercom Barge allows the IP phone to automatically answer an incoming intercom call
while an active call is in progress. The active call will be placed on hold.
Procedure
Incoming intercom calls can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the incoming intercom
call feature.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Incoming Intercom calls on page
296.
Configure the incoming intercom
call feature.
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
?p=features-intercom&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure the incoming intercom
call feature.
To configure intercom via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Intercom.
115
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of Accept Intercom, Intercom
Mute, Intercom Tone and Intercom Barge.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure intercom via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->Intercom.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired values from the
Accept Intercom, Intercom Mute, Warning Tone and Intercom Barge fields.
3.
116
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Configuring Advanced Features
This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following
advanced features:

Distinctive Ring Tones

Tones

Remote Phone Book

LDAP

Busy Lamp Field

Music on Hold

Automatic Call Distribution

Message Waiting Indicator

Multicast Paging

Call Recording

Hot Desking

Action URL

Action URI

Server Redundancy

LLDP

VLAN

VPN

Quality of Service

Network Address Translation

SNMP

802.1X Authentication

TR-069 Device Management

IPv6 Support
Distinctive ring tones allows particular incoming calls to trigger IP phones to play
distinctive ring tones. The IP phone inspects the INVITE request for an "Alert-Info" header
when receiving an incoming call. If the INVITE request contains an "Alert-Info" header,
the IP phone strips out the URL and keyword parameter and maps it to the appropriate
117
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
ring tone.
Alert-Info headers in the following two formats:
Alert-Info: localIP/Bellcore-drN
Alert-Info: <URL>;info=info text;x-line-id=0

If the Alter-Info header contains the keyword “Bellcore-drN”, the IP phone will play
the Bellcore-drN ring tone (N=1,2,3,4,5).
Example:
Alert-Info: http://127.0.0.1/Bellcore-dr1
The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring tone patterns and
cadences.
Bellcore
Pattern
Tone
ID
Bellcore-dr1
(standard)
Bellcore-dr2
1
2
Pattern
Cadence
(ms)
3600
4000
4400
Ringing
Long
630
800
1025
315
400
525
630
800
1025
3475
4000
4400
315
400
525
145
200
525
315
400
525
145
200
525
630
800
1025
2975
4000
4400
200
300
525
145
200
525
800
1000
1100
145
200
525
200
300
525
Silent
2975
4000
4400
Ringing
450
500
550
Silent
Ringing
Ringing
Long
Short
Short
Silent
Ringing
Long
Short
Long
Silent
Ringing
118
(ms)
4s Off
Silent
Note
(ms)
Silent
Ringing
5
Duration
2200
Silent
Bellcore-dr5
Duration
2000
Ringing
4
Duration
1800
Silent
Bellcore-dr4
Maximum
2s On
Ringing
3
Nominal
Ringing
Silent
Bellcore-dr3
Minimum
Short
“Bellcore-dr5” is a ring splash tone that reminds the user that DND or Always Call
Forward feature is enabled on the server-side.
Configuring Advanced Features

If the Alert-Info header contains a remote URL, the IP phone will try to download the
WAV ring tone file from the URL and then play the remote ring tone. If it fails to
download the file, the IP phone will plays the local ring tone associated with info
text. If there is no text matched, the IP phone will play the preconfigured local ring
tone in about ten seconds.
Example:
Alert-Info: http://192.168.0.12:8080/ring.wav/info=family;x-line-id=0
Procedure
Distinctive ring tones can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the distinctive ring
tones feature.
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Distinctive Ring Tones on page
298.
Configuration File
Configure the internal ringer
text and internal ringer file.
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Distinctive Ring Tones on page
298.
Configure the distinctive ring
tones feature.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-adv&q=load&ac
Local
Web User Interface
c=0
Configure the internal ringer
text and internal ringer file.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-ring&q=load
To configure distinctive ring tones via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
119
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Distinctive Ring Tones.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the internal ringer text and internal ringer file via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Ring.
2.
Enter the keywords in the Internal Ringer Text fields.
3.
Select the desired ring tones for each text from the pull-down lists of Internal Ringer
File.
4.
120
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Advanced Features
When receiving a message or recording a call, the IP phone will play a warning tone.
You can customize tones or select specialized tone sets (vary from country to country) to
indicate different conditions of the IP phone. The default tones used on IP phones are
the US tone sets. Available tone sets for IP phones:

Australia

Austria

Brazil

Belgium

China

Czech

Denmark

Finland

France

Germany

Great Britain

Greece

Hungary

Lithuania

India

Italy

Japan

Mexico

New Zealand

Netherlands

Norway

Portugal

Spain

Switzerland

Sweden

Russia

United States

Chile

Czech ETSI
121
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Configured tones can be heard on the IP phone for the following conditions:
Condition
Description
Dial
When in the pre-dialing interface
Ring Back
Ring-back tone
Busy
When the callee is busy
Congestion
When the network is congested
Call Waiting
Call waiting tone
Dial Recall
When receiving a call back
Record
When recording a call
Info
When receiving a special message
Stutter
When receiving a voice mail
Message
When receiving a text message
Auto Answer
When automatically answering a call
Procedure
Tones can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the tones for the IP
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
phone.
For more information, refer to
Tones on page 300.
Configure the tones for the IP
phone.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-tones&q=load
To configure tones via web user interface:
122
1.
Click on Settings->Tones.
2.
Select the desired type from the pull-down list of Select Country.
Configuring Advanced Features
If you select Custom, you can customize the tone for indicating each condition of the
IP phone.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Remote phone book is the centrally maintained phone book, stored on the remote
server. Users only need the access URL of the remote phone book. The IP phone can
establish a connection with the remote server and download the entries, and then
display the phone book entries on the phone user interface. IP phones support up to 5
remote phone books. For the SIP-T46G IP phone, all remote phone books must be less
than 0.5MB in size. For SIP-T42G and T41P IP phones, up to 5000 entries can be displayed
on the phone. Remote phone book is customizable. For more information, refer to
Remote XML Phone Book on page 216.
Sremote Name allows IP phones to query the entry names from the remote phone book
when receiving incoming calls. Sremote Name Flash Time defines how often IP phones
refresh the local cache of the remote phone book.
Procedure
Remote phone book can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Specify the access URL of the
remote phone book.
For more information, refer to
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Remote Phone Book on page
302.
Specify whether to query the
entry names from the remote
phone book when the IP phone
123
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
receives incoming calls.
Specify how often the IP phone
refreshes the local cache of the
remote phone book.
For more information, refer to
Remote Phone Book on page
302.
Specify the access URL of the
remote phone book.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=contacts-remote&q=load
Specify whether to query the
contact names from the remote
Local
Web User Interface
phone book when the IP phone
receives incoming calls.
Specify how often the IP phone
refreshes the local cache of the
remote phone book.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=contacts-remote&q=load
To specify the access URL of the remote phone book via web user interface:
124
1.
Click on Directory->Remote Phone Book.
2.
Enter the access URL in the Remote URL field.
3.
Enter the name in the Display Name field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change
Configuring Advanced Features
To configure the remote phone book via web user interface:
1.
Click on Directory->Remote Phone Book.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Search Remote Phonebook
Name.
3.
Enter the desired time in the Search Flash Time (Seconds) field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is an application protocol for accessing
and maintaining information services for the distributed directory over an IP network. IP
phones can be configured to interface with a corporate directory server that supports
LDAP version 2 or 3 (Microsoft’s Active Directory is included).
The biggest plus for LDAP is that users can access the central LDAP directory of the
corporation using IP phones, so they do not have to maintain the local directory. Users
can search and dial from the LDAP directory and save LDAP entries to the local directory.
LDAP entries displayed on the IP phone are read only. Users can not add, edit or delete
the LDAP entries. When an LDAP server is properly configured, the IP phone can look up
entries from the LDAP server in a wide variety of ways. The LDAP server indexes all the
data in its entries, and "filters" may be used to select the desired contact or group, and
return the desired information.
The configurations on the IP phone limit the amount of displayed entries when querying
from the LDAP server, and decide how the attributes are displayed and sorted.
You can assign a DSS key to be an LDAP key, and press the LDAP key to enter the LDAP
search screen when the IP phone is idle.
125
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
LDAP Attributes
The following table lists the most common attributes used to configure the LDAP lookup
on IP phones:
Abbreviation
Name
gn
givenName
Description
First name
LDAP attribute being made up
cn
commonName
from given name joined to
surname.
sn
surname
dn
distinguishedName
dc
dc
-
company
-
telephoneNumber
mobile
mobilephoneNumber
ipPhone
IPphoneNumber
Last name or family name
Unique identifier for each entry
Domain component
Company or organization name
Office phone number
Mobile or cellular phone number
Home phone number
Procedure
LDAP can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the LDAP feature.
For more information, refer to
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
LDAP on page 303.
Assign an LDAP key.
For more information, refer to
LDAP Key on page 367.
Configure the LDAP feature.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=contacts-LDAP&q=load
Local
Web User Interface
Assign an LDAP key.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=dsskey&model=1&q=loa
d&linepage=1
Phone User Interface
126
Assign an LDAP key.
Configuring Advanced Features
To configure LDAP via web user interface:
1.
Click on Directory->LDAP.
2.
Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable LDAP.
3.
Enter the values in the corresponding fields.
4.
Select the desired values from the corresponding pull-down lists.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure an LDAP key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select LDAP from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure an LDAP key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
127
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select LDAP from the Key Event field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) is used to monitor a specific user for status changes on IP phones.
For example, you can configure a BLF key on a supervisor’s phone to monitor the phone
user status (busy or idle). Then when the user makes a call, a busy indicator on the
supervisor’s phone shows that the user’s phone is in use.
When the monitored user is idle, the supervisor can press the BLF key to dial out the
phone number. When the monitored user receives an incoming call, the supervisor can
press the BLF key to pick up the call directly. When the monitored user is on a call, the
supervisor can press the BLF key to interrupt and set up a conference call.
Visual Alert and Audio Alert for BLF Pickup
Visual alert and audio alert for BLF pickup allow the supervisor’s phone to play an alert
tone and display a visual prompt (e.g., “6001<-6002”, 6001 is the monitored extension
and receives an incoming call from 6002) when the monitored user receives an
incoming call. In addition to the BLF key, visual alert for BLF pickup enables the
supervisors to pick up the monitored user’s incoming call by pressing the Pickup soft key.
The directed call pickup code must be configured in advance. For more information on
how to configure the directed call pickup code for the Pickup soft key, refer to Directed
Call Pickup on page 94.
LED Off in Idle
LED off in idle defines two flashing methods for the BLF key LED. The BLF key LED flashes
as below:
Line key LED (configured as BLF key when LED Off in Idle is disabled)
LED Status
Solid green
Description
The monitored user is idle.
The monitored user is busy.
Solid red
The call is parked against the monitored user’s phone
number.
128
Fast flashing red
The monitored user receives an incoming call.
Off
The monitored user does not exist.
Configuring Advanced Features
Line key LED (configured as BLF key when LED Off in Idle is enabled)
LED Status
Description
The monitored user is busy.
Solid red
The call is parked against the monitored user’s phone
number.
Fast flashing red
Off
The monitored user receives an incoming call.
The monitored user is idle.
The monitored user does not exist.
Procedure
BLF can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Assign a BLF key.
For more information, refer to
BLF Key on page 367.
Specify whether to use visual
Configuration File
y0000000000xx.cfg
alert and audio alert for BLF
pickup.
Configure LED off in idle.
For more information, refer to
BLF on page 308.
Assign a BLF key.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=dsskey&model=1&q=loa
d&linepage=1
Specify whether to use visual
alert and audio alert for BLF
pickup.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-callpickup&q=lo
ad
Configure LED off in idle.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-general&q=loa
d
Phone User Interface
Assign a BLF key.
129
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
To configure a BLF key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select BLF from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Enter the phone number or extension you want to monitor in the Value field.
4.
Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure visual alert and audio alert features via web user interface:
130
1.
Click on Features->Call Pickup.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Visual Alert for BLF Pickup.
3.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Audio Alert for BLF Pickup.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Advanced Features
To configure the LED off in idle via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of LED Off in Idle.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a BLF key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select BLF from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account
ID field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Enter the phone number or extension you want to monitor in the Value field.
7.
(Optional.) Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field.
8.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Music on Hold (MoH) is the business practice of playing recorded music to fill the
silence that would be heard by the party who has been placed on hold. To use this
feature, specify a SIP URI pointing to an MoH server account. When a call is placed on
hold, the IP phone will send an INVITE message to the specified MoH server account
according to the SIP URI. The MoH server account automatically responds to the INVITE
message and immediately plays audio from some source located anywhere (LAN,
131
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Internet) to the held party.
Procedure
Music on Hold can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the MoH feature on a
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
per-line basis.
For more information, refer to
Music on Hold on page 309.
Configure the MoH feature on a
per-line basis.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-adv&q=load&acc=
0
To configure MoH via web user interface:
132
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Enter the SIP URI (e.g., sip:moh@sip.com) in the Music Server URI field.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Advanced Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) enables organizations to manage a large number of
phone calls on an individual basis. ACD enables the use of IP phones in a call-center
role by automatically distributing incoming calls to available users, or agents. ACD
depends on support from a SIP server. ACD is disabled on the phone by default. You
need to enable it on a per-line basis before logging into the ACD system.
After the IP phone user logs into the queue, the server monitors the phone status and
then decides whether to assign an incoming call to the user’s IP phone. When the phone
status is changed to unavailable, the server stops distributing calls to the IP phone. The
IP phone will remain in the unavailable status until the IP phone user manually changes
the phone status or the ACD auto available timer (if configured) expires. How long the
IP phone remains unavailable is configurable by the auto available timer. When the
timer expires, the phone status is automatically changed to available. The ACD auto
available timer feature depends on support from a SIP server.
You need to configure an ACD key for the user to log into the ACD system. The ACD key
LED on the IP phone can indicates the ACD status.
Procedure
ACD can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure ACD.
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
ACD on page 310.
Assign an ACD key.
For more information, refer to
Configuration File
ACD Key on page 368.
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configure ACD auto available
timer.
For more information, refer to
ACD on page 310.
Assign an ACD key.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=dsskey&model=1&q=load&li
Local
Web User Interface
nepage=1
Configure ACD auto available
timer.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-acd&q=load
133
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Phone User Interface
Assign an ACD key.
To configure an ACD key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select ACD from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the ACD auto available timer feature via web user interface:
134
1.
Click on Features->ACD.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of ACD Auto Available.
3.
Enter the desired timer in the ACD Auto Available Timer (0~120s) field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Advanced Features
To configure an ACD key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
4.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
5.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
or
, or the Switch soft key to select ACD from the Type field.
Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) informs users that they have messages in their
mailbox; and how many messages are waiting, without the user having to call the
mailbox. IP phones support both audio and visual MWI when receiving new voice
messages.
IP phones support both solicited and unsolicited MWI. Unsolicited MWI is a server
related feature.
IP phone sends a SUBSCRIBE message to the server for message-summary updates.
The server sends a message-summary NOTIFY within the subscription dialog each time
the MWI status changes. For solicited MWI, you must enable the MWI subscription
feature on IP phones. IP phones can subscribe the MWI messages to the account or the
voice mail number.
IP phones do not need to subscribe to message-summary updates. The server
automatically sends a message-summary NOTIFY in a new dialog each time the MWI
status changes.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure subscribe for MWI.
Configure subscribe MWI to voice
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
mail.
For more information, refer to
Message Waiting Indicator on
page 310.
Configure subscribe for MWI.
Configure subscribe MWI to voice
mail.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-adv&q=load&acc=
0
135
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
To configure subscribe for MWI via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Subscribe for MWI.
5.
Enter the period time in the MWI Subscription Period (Seconds) field.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
The IP phone will subscribe to the account number for MWI service by default.
To configure subscribe MWI to voice mail via web user interface:
136
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Subscribe MWI to Voice Mail.
Configuring Advanced Features
5.
Enter the desired voice number in the Voice Mail field.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Multicast paging allows IP phones to send/receive Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP)
streams to/from the pre-configured multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling.
Up to 10 listening multicast addresses can be specified on the IP phone.
Users can send an RTP stream without involving SIP signaling by pressing a configured
multicast paging key. A multicast address (IP: Port) should be assigned to the multicast
paging key, which is defined to transmit RTP stream to a group of designated IP phones.
When the IP phone sends the RTP stream to a pre-configured multicast address, each IP
phone that preconfigured to listen to the multicast address can receive the RTP stream.
When the originator stops sending the RTP stream, the subscribers stop receiving it.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Assign a multicast paging key.
For more information, refer to
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Multicast Paging Key on page
369.
Specifies a multicast codec for
the IP phone to use for multicast
137
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
RTP.
For more information, refer to
Sending RTP Stream on page 312.
Assign a multicast paging key.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=dsskey&model=1&q=load&li
nepage=1
Local
Web User Interface
Specifies a multicast codec for
the IP phone to use to send the
RTP stream.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
Phone User Interface
Assign a multicast paging key.
To configure a multicast paging key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Paging from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Enter the multicast IP address and port number in the Value field.
The valid multicast IP addresses range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a codec for multicast paging via web user interface:
1.
138
Click on Features ->General Information.
Configuring Advanced Features
2.
Select the desired codec from the pull-down list of Multicast Codec.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a multicast paging key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Multicast Paging from the Key
Event field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Enter the multicast IP address and port number in the Value field.
7.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
IP phones can receive an RTP stream from the pre-configured multicast address(es)
without involving SIP signaling, and can handle the incoming multicast paging calls
differently depending on the configurations of Paging Barge and Paging Priority Active.
Paging Barge
This parameter defines the priority of the voice call in progress, and decides how the IP
phone handles the incoming multicast paging calls when there is already a voice call in
progress. If the parameter is configured as disabled, all incoming multicast paging calls
will be automatically ignored. If the parameter is the priority value, the incoming
139
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
multicast paging calls with higher priority are automatically answered and the ones
with lower priority are ignored.
Paging Priority Active
This parameter decides how the IP phone handles the incoming multicast paging calls
when there is already a multicast paging call in progress. If the parameter is configured
as disabled, the IP phone will automatically ignore all incoming multicast paging calls. If
the parameter is configured as enabled, an incoming multicast paging call with higher
priority is automatically answered, and the one with lower priority is ignored.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the listening multicast
address.
Configure the Paging Barge and
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Paging Priority Active features.
For more information, refer to
Receiving RTP Stream on page
313.
Configure the listening multicast
address.
Configure the Paging Barge and
Local
Web User Interface
Paging Priority Active features.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=contacts-multicastIP&q=load
To configure a listening multicast address via web user interface:
1.
Click on Directory->Multicast IP.
2.
Enter the listening multicast address and port number in the Listening Address field.
1 is the highest priority and 10 is the lowest priority.
3.
140
Enter the label in the Label field.
Configuring Advanced Features
The label will appear on the LCD screen when receiving the RTP multicast.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the paging barge and paging priority active features via web user
interface:
1.
Click on Directory->Multicast IP.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Paging Barge.
3.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Paging Priority Active.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
141
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Call recording enables users to record calls. It depends on support from a SIP server.
When the user presses the call record key, the IP phone sends a record request to the
server. IP phones themselves do not have memory to store the recording, what they can
do is to trigger the recording and indicate the recording status.
Normally, there are 2 main methods to trigger a recording on a certain server. We call
them record and URL record. Record is for the IP phone to send the server a SIP INFO
message containing a specific header. URL record is for the IP phone to send an HTTP
URL to the server. The server processes these messages and decides to start or stop a
recording.
Record
When a user presses a record key for the first time during a call, the IP phone sends a
SIP INFO message to the server with the specific header “Record: on”, and then the
recording starts.
Example of a SIP INFO message:
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.1.4.148:5063;branch=z9hG4bK1139980711
From: "827" <sip:827@192.168.1.199>;tag=2066430997
To:<sip:614@192.168.1.199>;tag=371745247
Call-ID: 1895019940@10.1.4.148
CSeq: 2 INFO
Contact: <sip:827@10.1.4.148:5063>
Max-Forwards: 70
User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.71.0.10
Record: on
Content-Length: 0
When the user presses the record key for the second time, the IP phone sends a SIP
INFO message to the server with the specific header “Record: off”, and then the
recording stops.
Example of a SIP INFO message:
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.1.4.148:5063;branch=z9hG4bK1619489730
From: "827" <sip:827@192.168.1.199>;tag=1831694891
To:<sip:614@192.168.1.199>;tag=2228378244
Call-ID: 1051886688@10.1.4.148
CSeq: 3 INFO
Contact: <sip:827@10.1.4.148:5063>
Max-Forwards: 70
User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.71.0.10
Record: off
142
Configuring Advanced Features
Content-Length: 0
URL Record
When a user presses a URL record key for the first time during a call, the IP phone sends
an HTTP GET message to the server.
Example of an HTTP GET message:
Get /phonerecording.cgi?model=yealink HTTP/1.0\r\n
Request Method: GET
Request URI: /phonerecording.cgi?model=yealink
Request version: HTTP/1.0
Host: 10.1.2.224\r\n
User-agent: yealink SIP-T46G 28.71.0.10 00:16:65:11:30:68\r\n
If the recording is successfully started, the server will respond with a 200 OK message.
Example of a 200 OK message:
<YealinkIPPhoneText>
<Title>
</Title>
<Text>
The recording session is successfully started.
</Text>
<YealinkIPPhoneText>
If the recording fails for some reasons, for example, the recording box is full, the server
will respond with a 200 OK message.
Example of a 200 OK message:
<YealinkIPPhoneText>
<Title>
</Title>
<Text>
Probably the recording box is full.
</Text>
<YealinkIPPhoneText>
When the user presses the URL record key for the second time, the IP phone sends an
HTTP GET message to the server, and then the server will respond with a 200 OK
message.
Example of a 200 OK message:
<YealinkIPPhoneText>
<Title>
</Title>
143
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
<Text>
The recording session is successfully stopped.
</Text>
<YealinkIPPhoneText>
Procedure
Call recording key can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Assign a record key.
For more information, refer to
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Record Key on page 369.
Assign a URL record key.
For more information, refer to URL
Record Key on page 370.
Assign a record key.
Assign a URL record key.
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
Local
?p=dsskey&model=1&q=load&li
nepage=1
Phone User Interface
Assign a record key.
Assign a URL record key.
To configure a record key via web user interface:
144
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Record from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Advanced Features
To configure a URL record key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select URL Record from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Enter the URL in the Value field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a record key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Record from the Key Event field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
To configure a URL record key via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
4.
Enter the URL in the URL Record field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
or
, or the Switch soft key to select URL Record from the Type field.
Hot desking originates from the definition of being the temporary physical occupant of
a work station or surface by a particular employee. A primary motivation for hot
desking is cost reduction. Hot desking is regularly used in places where not all the
employees are in the office at the same time, or not in the office for long periods at a
145
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
time, which means actual personal offices would often be vacant, consuming valuable
space and resources.
The hot desking feature allows a user to clear registration configurations of all accounts
on the IP phone, and then register his account on line 1. To use this feature, you need to
assign a hot desking key.
Procedure
Hot desking key can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Assign a hot desking key.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to Hot
Desking Key on page 370.
Assign a hot desking key.
Web User Interface
Local
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=dsskey&q=load&model=1
Phone User Interface
Assign a hot desking key.
To configure a hot desking key via web user interface:
1.
Click on DSSKey->Line Keys.
2.
In the desired DSS key field, select Hot Desking from the pull-down list of Type.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure a hot desking key via phone user interface:
146
1.
Press Menu->Call Features->DSS Keys.
2.
Select the desired DSS key.
3.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
4.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select Hot Desking from the Key Event
Configuring Advanced Features
field.
5.
(Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
6.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
Action URL allows IP phones to interact with web server applications by sending an
HTTP or HTTPS GET request. You can specify a URL that triggers a GET request when a
specified event occurs. Action URL can only be triggered by the pre-defined events
(e.g., log on). The valid URL format is: http(s)://IP address of the server/help.xml?.
The following table lists the pre-defined events for action URL.
Event
Description
Setup Completed
When the IP phone completes startup.
Registered
When the IP phone successfully registers an account.
Unregistered
When the IP phone logs off the registered account.
Register Failed
When the IP phone fails to register an account.
Off Hook
When the IP phone is off hook.
On Hook
When the IP phone is on hook.
Incoming Call
When the IP phone receives an incoming call.
Outgoing Call
When the IP phone places a call.
Established
When the IP phone establishes a call.
Call Terminated
When the IP phone terminates a call.
Open DND
When the IP phone enables the DND mode.
Close DND
When the IP phone disables the DND mode.
Open Always Forward
When the IP phone enables the always forward.
Close Always Forward
When the IP phone disables the always forward.
Open Busy Forward
When the IP phone enables the busy forward.
Close Busy Forward
When the IP phone disables the busy forward.
Open No Answer Forward
When the IP phone enables the no answer forward.
Close No Answer Forward
When the IP phone disables the no answer forward
Transfer Call
When the IP phone transfers a call.
Blind Transfer
When the IP phone blind transfers a call.
Attended Transfer
When the IP phone performs the attended transfer.
Hold
When the IP phone places a call on hold.
147
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Event
Description
UnHold
When the IP phone retrieves a hold call.
Mute
When the IP phone mutes a call.
UnMute
When the IP phone unmutes a call.
Missed Call
When the IP phone misses a call.
IP Changed
When the IP address of the IP phone changes.
Forward Incoming Call
When the IP phone forwards an incoming call.
Reject Incoming Call
When the IP phone rejects an incoming call.
Answer New-In Call
When the IP phone answers a new call.
Transfer Finished
When the IP phone completes to transfer a call.
Transfer Failed
When the IP phone fails to transfer a call.
Idle to Busy
Busy to Idle
Call Interrupt
Autop Finish
When the state of the IP phone changes from idle to
busy.
When the state of phone changes from busy to idle.
When the IP phone cancels the call in the connecting
interface.
When the IP phone finishes auto provisioning.
An HTTP or HTTPS GET request may contain variable name and variable value,
separated by “=”. Each variable value starts with $ in the query part of the URL. The
valid URL format is: http(s)://IP address of server/help.xml?variable name=$variable
value. Variable name can be customized by users, while the variable value is
pre-defined. For example, a URL http://192.168.1.10/help.xml?mac=$mac is specified for
the event Mute, $mac will be dynamically replaced with the MAC address of the IP
phone when the IP phone mutes a call.
The following table lists the pre-defined variable values.
Variable Value
Description
$mac
MAC address of the IP phone
$ip
The current IP address of the IP phone
$model
Phone model
$firmware
Phone firmware version
The SIP URI of the current account when the IP phone
$active_url
places a call, receives an incoming call or establishes
a call.
$active_user
148
The user part of the SIP URI for the current account
when the IP phone places a call, receives an incoming
Configuring Advanced Features
Variable Value
Description
call or establishes a call.
The host part of the SIP URI for the current account
$active_host
when the IP phone places a call, receives an incoming
call or establishes a call.
The SIP URI of the caller when the IP phone places a
$local
call.
The SIP URI of the callee when the IP phone receives
an incoming call.
The SIP URI of the callee when the IP phone places a
$remote
call.
The SIP URI of the caller when the IP phone receives
an incoming call.
The display name of the caller when the IP phone
$display_local
places a call.
The display name of the callee when the IP phone
receives an incoming call.
The display name of the callee when the IP phone
$display_remote
places a call.
The display name of the caller when the IP phone
receives an incoming call.
$call_id
The call-id of the active call.
Procedure
Action URL can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the action URL on the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
IP phone.
For more information, refer to
Action URL on page 314.
Configure the action URL on the
IP phone.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=features-actionurl&q=loa
d
To configure action URL via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Action URL.
149
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Enter the action URLs in the corresponding fields.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Opposite to action URL, action URI allows IP phones to interact with web server
application by receiving and handling an HTTP or HTTPS GET request. When receiving a
GET request, the IP phone will perform the specified action and respond with a 200 OK
message. A GET request may contain variable named as “key” and variable value,
separated by “=”. The valid URI format is:
http(s)://phone IP address/servlet?key=variable value.
The following table lists the pre-defined variable values.
Variable Value
OK/ENTER
Press the OK key or the Enter soft key.
SPEAKER
Press the Speaker key.
F_TRANSFER
Press the TRANSFER key (only for SIP-T46G) or the
Transfer soft key.
VOLUME_UP
Increase the volume.
VOLUME_DOWN
Decrease the volume.
MUTE
Press the MUTE key.
F_HOLD
150
Phone Action
Press the HOLD key (only for SIP-T46G) or the Hold soft
key.
X
Press the X key.
0-9/*/POUND
Send the DTMF digit (0-9, * or #).
Configuring Advanced Features
Variable Value
L1-LX
Phone Action
Press the line key (for SIP-T46G, X=27, for
SIP-T42G/T41P, X=15).
F_CONFERENCE
Press the Conference soft key.
F1-F4
Press the soft key.
MSG
Press the MESSAGE key.
HEADSET
Press the HEADSET key.
RD
Press the REDIAL key.
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
Press the Navigation keys.
Reboot the IP phone.
Reboot
Note: The IP phone cannot reboot during a call by
default.
Note
AutoP
Let the IP phone perform auto provisioning.
DNDOn
Activate the DND mode.
DNDOff
Deactivate the DND mode.
The variable value does not work with all events. For example, the variable value
“MUTE” is only applicable when the IP phone is during a call.
For security reasons, IP phones do not receive and handle the HTTP/HTTPS GET requests
by default. You need to specify the trusted IP address for action URI. When the IP phone
receives a GET request from the specified IP address for the first time, the LCD screen
prompts the message “Allow Remote Control?”. You can specify one or more trusted IP
addresses on the IP phone, or configure the IP phone to receive and handle the URI
from any IP address.
Procedure
Specify the trusted IP address for Action URI using the configuration files or locally.
Specify the trusted IP
address(es) for sending the
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Action URI to the IP phone.
For more information, refer to
Action URI on page 316.
Specify the trusted IP
address(es) for sending the
Local
Web User Interface
Action URI to the IP phone.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
151
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
et?p=features-remotecontrl&q
=load
To configure the trusted IP address(es) for Action URI via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->Remote Control.
2.
Enter the IP address or any in the Action URI allow IP List field.
Multiple IP addresses are separated by comma. If you enter “any” in this field, the
IP phone can receive and handle GET requests from any IP address. If you leave
the field blank, the IP phone cannot receive or handle any HTTP GET request.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Server redundancy is often required in VoIP deployments to ensure continuity of phone
service, for events where the server needs to be taken offline for maintenance, the
server fails, or the connection between the IP phone and the server fails.
Two types of redundancy are possible. In some cases, a combination of the two may be
deployed:

Failover: In this mode, the full phone system functionality is preserved by having a
second equivalent capability call server take over from the one that has gone
down/off-line. This mode of operation should be done using the DNS mechanisms
from the primary to the secondary server.

Fallback: In this mode, a second less featured call server (fallback server) with SIP
capability takes over call control to provide basic calling capability, but without
some of the richer features offered by the working server (for example, shared
lines, call recording and MWI). IP phones support configuration of two SIP servers
per SIP registration for fallback purpose.
152
Configuring Advanced Features
Phone Configuration for Redundancy Implementation
To assist in explaining the redundancy behavior, an illustrative example of how an IP
phone may be configured is shown next. In the example, server redundancy for
fallback and failover purposes is deployed. Two separate SIP servers (a working server
and a fallback server) are configured for per line registration.
Working Server: Server 1 is configured with the domain name of the working server. For
example, sip:user@example.com. DNS mechanism is used such that the working server
is capable of resolving to multiple physical SIP servers for failover purpose. The working
server is deployed in redundant pairs, designated as primary and secondary servers.
The primary server is the highest priority server in a cluster of servers resolved by the
DNS server. The secondary server backs up a primary server when the primary server
fails and offers the same functionality as the primary server.
Fallback Server: Server 2 is configured with the address of the fallback server. For
example, 192.168.1.15. A fallback server offers lesser functionality than the working
server.
Phone Registration
Two registration methods for fallback mode:

Concurrent registration: The IP phone registers to two SIP servers (working server
and fallback server) at the same time. In a failure situation, a fallback server can
take over the basic calling capability, but without some advanced features offered
by the working server (default registration method).

Successive registration: The IP phone only registers to one server at a time. The IP
phone first registers to the working server. In a failure situation, the IP phone
registers to the fallback server.
When registering to the working server, the IP phone must always register to the primary
153
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
server first except in failover conditions. When the primary server registration is
unavailable, the secondary server will serve as the working server.
Procedure
Server redundancy can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the server
redundancy on the IP phone.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Server Redundancy on page
317.
Configure the server
redundancy on the IP phone.
Local
Navigate to:
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-register&q=load
&acc=0
If a domain name is configured for a SIP server, the IP address(es) associated with that
domain name will be discovered through DNS as specified by RFC 3263. The DNS query
involves NAPTR, SRV and A queries, which allows the IP phone to adapt to various
deployment environments. The IP phone performs the NAPTR query for the SRV pointer
and service type (UDP, TCP and TLS), the SRV query on the record returned from the
NAPTR for the host name and the port number, and the A query for the IP addresses.
If a port is set to 0 and the transport type is set to DNS-NAPTR, NAPTR and SRV queries
will be tried before falling back to A query. If no port is found through the DNS query,
5060 will be used. If an explicit port (except 0) is specified and the transport type is set
to DNS-NAPTR, the only lookup will be an A query.
The following details the procedures of DNS query for the IP phone to resolve the
domain name of working server into the IP address, port and transport protocol.
NAPTR (Naming Authority Pointer)
First, the IP phone sends the NAPTR query to get the SRV pointer and service type. The IP
phone performs a NAPTR query for the domain name. Example of NAPTR records:
order
154
pref
flags
service
regexp
replacement
IN NAPTR
90
50
"s"
"SIP+D2T"
""
_sip._tcp.example.com
IN NAPTR
100
50
"s"
"SIP+D2U"
""
_sip._udp.example.com
Configuring Advanced Features
Parameters are explained in the following table:
Parameter
order
pref
flags
Description
Specify preferential treatment for the specific record. The order
is from lowest to highest, lower order is MORE preferred.
Specify the preference for processing multiple NAPTR records
with the same order value. Lower value is MORE preferred.
The flag “s” means to perform an SRV lookup.
Specify the transport protocols supported by the domain server:
SIP+D2U: SIP over UDP
service
SIP+D2T: SIP over TCP
SIP+D2S: SIP over SCTP
SIPS+D2T: SIPS over TCP
regexp
replacement
Always empty for SIP services.
Specify a domain name for the next query.
The IP phone picks the first record, because its order of 90 is lower than 100. The pref
parameter is unimportant as there is no other record with order 90. The flag “s”
indicates performing the SRV query next. TCP will be used, targeted to a host
determined by an SRV query of “_sip._tcp.example.com”. If the flag of the NAPTR record
returned is empty, the IP phone will perform the NAPTR query again according to the
previous NAPTR query result.
SRV (Service Location Record)
The IP phone performs a SRV query on the record returned from the NAPTR for the host
name and the port number. Example of SRV records:
Priority
Weight
Port
Target
IN SRV
0
1
5060
server1.example.com
IN SRV
0
2
5060
server2.example.com
Parameters are explained in the following table:
Parameter
Priority
Description
Specify preferential treatment for the specific host entry. Lower
priority is MORE preferred.
When priorities are equal, weight is used to differentiate the
Weight
preference. The preference is from highest to lowest. Again,
keep the same to load balance.
Port
Target
Identify the port number to be used.
Identify the actual host for an A query.
155
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
SRV query returns two records. The two SRV records point to different hosts and have
the same priority 0. The weight of the second record is higher than the first one, so the
second record will be picked first. The two records also contain a port “5060”, the IP
phone uses this port. If the Target is not a numeric IP address, the IP phone performs the
A query. So in this case, the IP phone uses “server1.example.com” and
“server2.example.com" for the A query.
A (Host IP Address)
The IP phone performs A query for the IP address of the target host name. Example of A
records:
IN A
62.10.1.10
INA
62.10.1.20
The IP phone picks the IP address “62.10.1.20” first.
Outgoing Call When the Working Server Connection Fails
When a user initiates a call, the phone will go through the following steps to connect the
call:
1.
Sends the INVITE request to the primary server.
2.
If the primary server does not respond correctly to the INVITE, then tries to make the
call using the secondary server.
3.
If the secondary server is also unavailable, the IP phone will try the fallback server
until it either succeeds in making a call or exhausts all servers at which point the
call will fail.
At the start of a call, server availability is determined by SIP signaling failure. SIP
signaling failure depends on the SIP protocol being used as described below:

If TCP is used, then the signaling fails if the connection or the send fails.

If UDP is used, then the signaling fails if ICMP is detected or if the signal times out. If
the signaling has been attempted through all servers in the list and this is the last
server, then the signaling fails after the complete UDP timeout defined in RFC 3261.
If it is not the last server in the list, the maximum number of retries depends on the
configured retry count.
Procedure
SIP server domain name resolution can be configured using the configuration files or
locally.
Configure the transport type.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
SIP Server Domain Name
Resolution on page 321.
156
Configuring Advanced Features
Configure the transport type.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-register&q=load
&acc=0
To configure the server redundancy and transport type via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Transport.
4.
Configure parameters of the SIP server 1 in the corresponding fields.
5.
Configure parameters of the SIP server 2 in the corresponding fields.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
LLDP (Linker Layer Discovery Protocol) is a vendor-neutral Link Layer protocol, which
allows IP phones to receive and/or transmit device-related information to directly
connected devices on the network that are also using the protocol, and store the
information that is learned about other devices. LLDP transmits information as packets
called LLDP Data Units (LLDPDUs). An LLDPDU consists of a set of Type-Length-Value (TLV)
elements, each of which contains a particular type of information about the device or
port transmitting it.
157
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery)
LLDP-MED is published by the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA). It is an
extension to LLDP that operates between endpoint devices and network connectivity
devices. LLDP-MED provides the following capabilities for IP phones:

Capabilities Discovery -- allows LLDP-MED IP phones to determine the capabilities
that the connected switch supports and has enabled.

Network Policy -- provides voice VLAN configuration to notify IP phones which VLAN
to use and QoS-related configuration for voice data. It provides a “plug and play”
network environment.

Power Management -- provides information related to how IP phones are powered,
power priority, and how much power IP phones need.

Inventory Management -- provides a means to effectively manage IP phones and
their attributes such as model number, serial number and software revision.
TLVs supported by IP phones are summarized in the following table:
TLV Type
Mandatory TLVs
TLV Name
Description
Chassis ID
The network address of the IP phone.
Port ID
The MAC address of the IP phone.
Time To Live
End of LLDPDU
System Name
System Description
Seconds until data unit expires.
The default value is 60s.
Marks end of LLDPDU.
Name assigned to the IP phone.
The default value is “yealink”.
Description of the IP phone.
The default value is “yealink”.
The supported and enabled phone
capabilities.
Optional TLVs
System Capabilities
The supported capabilities are Bridge,
Telephone and Router.
The enabled capabilities are Bridge and
Telephone by default.
Port Description
IEEE Std 802.3
Organizationally
Specific TLV
158
Description of port that sends data unit.
The default value is “WAN PORT”.
Duplex and bit rate settings of the IP
MAC/PHY
phone.
Configuration/Status
The Auto Negotiation is supported and
enabled by default.
Configuring Advanced Features
TLV Type
TLV Name
Description
The advertised capabilities of PMD.
Auto-Negotiation is: 100BASE-TX (full
duplex mode), 100BASE-TX (half duplex
mode), 10BASE-T (full duplex mode),
10BASE-T (half duplex mode).
The MED device type of the IP phone and
the supported LLDP-MED TLV type can be
Media Capabilities
encapsulated in LLDPDU.
The supported LLDP-MED TLV types are:
LLDP-MED Capabilities, Network Policy,
Extended Power via MDI-PD, Inventory.
Network Policy
Extended
Power-via-MDI
Inventory –
TIA
Organizationally
Specific TLVs
Hardware Revision
Inventory –
Firmware Revision
Inventory –
Software Revision
Inventory – Serial
Number
Port VLAN ID, application type, L2 priority
and DSCP value.
Power type, source, priority and value.
Hardware revision of phone.
Firmware revision of phone.
Software revision of phone.
Serial number of phone.
Inventory –
Manufacturer name of phone.
Manufacturer Name
The default value is “yealink”.
Inventory – Model
Name
Asset ID
Model name of phone.
Assertion identifier of phone.
The default value is “asset”.
Procedure
LLDP can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure LLDP feature.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
LLDP on page 322.
Local
Web User Interface
Configure LLDP feature.
159
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=network-adv&q=load
To configure LLDP via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
In the LLDP block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active.
3.
Enter the desired time interval in the Packet Interval (1~3600s) field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after reboot.
5.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is used to logically divide a physical network into
several broadcast domains. VLAN membership can be configured through software
instead of physically relocating devices or connections. Grouping devices with a
common set of requirements regardless of their physical location can greatly simplify
network design. VLANs can address issues such as scalability, security, and network
management.
The purpose of VLAN configurations on the IP phone is to insert tag with VLAN
information to the packets generated by the IP phone. When VLAN is properly
configured for the ports (internet port and PC port) on the IP phone, the IP phone will tag
all packets from these ports with the VLAN ID. The switch receives and forwards the
tagged packets to the corresponding VLAN according to the VLAN ID in the tag as
described in IEEE Std 802.3.
160
Configuring Advanced Features
The VLAN feature on IP phones allows simultaneous access for a regular PC. This feature
allows a PC to be daisy chained to an IP phone and the connection for both PC and IP
phone to be trunked through the same physical Ethernet cable.
In addition to manual configuration, the IP phone also supports automatic discovery of
VLAN via LLDP or DHCP. The assignment takes place in this order: assignment via LLDP,
manual configuration, then assignment via DHCP.
VLAN Discovery via DHCP
IP phones support VLAN discovery via DHCP. When the VLAN Discovery method is set to
DHCP, the IP phone will examine DHCP option for a valid VLAN ID. The predefined
option 132 is used to supply the VLAN ID by default. You can customize the DHCP option
used to request the VLAN ID.
Procedure
VLAN can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure VLAN for the Internet
port.
For more information, refer to
VLAN on page 323.
Configure VLAN for the PC port.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
VLAN on page 323.
Configure the DHCP VLAN
discovery feature.
For more information, refer to
VLAN on page 323.
Configure VLAN for the Internet
port and PC port and the DHCP
Web User Interface
Local
VLAN discovery feature.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=network-adv&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure VLAN for the Internet
port and PC port.
To configure VLAN for Internet port via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
In the VLAN block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of WAN Port
Active.
3.
Enter the VLAN ID in the VID (1-4094) field.
161
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
4.
Select the desired value (0-7) from the pull-down list of Priority.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt reboot to make the settings effective.
6.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure VLAN for PC port via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
In the VLAN block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of PC Port Active.
3.
Enter the VLAN ID in the VID (1-4094) field.
4.
Select the desired value (0-7) from the pull-down list of Priority.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after reboot.
6.
162
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
Configuring Advanced Features
To configure the DHCP VLAN discovery via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
In the VLAN block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of DHCP VLAN
Active.
3.
Enter the desired option in the Option field.
The default option is 132.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after reboot.
5.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure VLAN for Internet port (or PC port) via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->WAN Port (or PC
Port).
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the VLAN
Status field.
3.
Enter the VLAN ID (1-4094) in the VID Number field.
4.
Enter the priority value (0-7) in the Priority field.
5.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
The IP phone reboots automatically to make settings effective after a period of
time.
VPN (Virtual Private Network) is a secured private network connection built on top of
public telecommunication infrastructure, such as the Internet. It provides remote offices
or individual users with secure access to their organization's network. VPN has become
163
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
more prevalent due to the benefits: scalability, reliability, convenience and security.
There are two types of VPN access: remote-access VPN (connecting an individual
device to a network) and site-to-site VPN (connecting two networks together).
Remote-access VPN allows employees to access their company's intranet from home or
outside the office, and site-to-site VPN allows employees in geographically separated
offices to share one cohesive virtual network. VPN can be also classified by the
protocols used to tunnel the traffic. It provides security through tunneling protocols:
IPSec, SSL, L2TP and PPTP.
IP phones support SSL VPN, which provides remote-access VPN capabilities through SSL.
OpenVPN is a full featured SSL VPN software solution that creates secure connections in
remote access facilities, designed to work with the TUN/TAP virtual networking interface.
TUN and TAP are virtual network kernel devices. TAP simulates a link layer device and
provides a virtual point-to-point connection, while TUN simulates a network layer device
and provides a virtual network segment. IP phones use OpenVPN to achieve the VPN
feature. To prevent disclosure of private information, tunnel endpoints must authenticate
each other before secure VPN tunnel is established. After the VPN feature is configured
properly on the IP phone, the IP phone acts as a VPN client and uses the certificates to
authenticate the VPN server.
To use the VPN feature, the compressed package of VPN-related files should be
uploaded to the IP phone in advance. The file format of the compressed package must
be .tar. The VPN-related files are: certificates (ca.crt and client.crt), key (client.key) and
the configuration file (vpn.cnf) of the VPN client. For more information on how to
package a .tar file, refer to VPN Feature on Yealink IP Phones .
Procedure
VPN can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the OpenVPN feature
and upload a tar file to the IP
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
phone.
For more information, refer to
VPN on page 325.
Configure the OpenVPN feature
and upload a tar package to
Web User Interface
Local
the IP phone.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=network-adv&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure the OpenVPN
feature.
To upload the tar file to the IP phone and configure VPN via web user interface:
1.
164
Click on Network->Advanced.
Configuring Advanced Features
2.
Click Browse to locate the tar package from the local system.
3.
Click Import to import the tar file.
The web user interface prompts the message “Import config…”.
4.
In the VPN block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after reboot.
6.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure VPN via phone user interface after uploading the tar file:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->VPN.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the VPN
Active field.
3.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
The IP phone reboots automatically to make settings effective after a period of
time.
Quality of Service (QoS) is the ability to provide different priorities to different packets in
the network, allowing the transport of traffic with special requirements. QoS guarantees
are important for applications that require fixed bit rate and are delay sensitive when
the network capacity is insufficient. There are four major QoS factors to consider when
configuring a modern QoS implementation: bandwidth, delay, jitter and loss.
165
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
QoS provides better network service by providing the following features:

Supporting dedicated bandwidth

Improving loss characteristics

Avoiding and managing network congestion

Shaping network traffic

Setting traffic priorities across the network
The Best-Effort service is the default QoS model in the IP networks. It provides no
guarantees for data delivering, which means delay, jitter, packet loss and bandwidth
allocation are unpredictable. Differentiated Services (DiffServ or DS) is the most widely
supported QoS model. It provides a simple and scalable mechanism for classifying and
managing network traffic and providing QoS on modern IP networks. Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) is used to define DiffServ classes and stored in the first six
bits of the ToS (Type of Service) field. Each router on the network can provide QoS
simply based on the DiffServ class. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 with each DSCP
specifying a particular per-hop behavior (PHB) applicable to a packet. A PHB refers to
the packet scheduling, queuing, policing, or shaping behavior of a node on any given
packet.
There are four standard PHBs available to construct a DiffServ-enabled network and
achieve QoS:

Class Selector PHB – backwards compatible with IP precedence. Class Selector
code points are of the form “xxx000”. The first three bits are the IP precedence bits.
These PHBs retain almost the same forwarding behavior as nodes that implement
IP-precedence based classification and forwarding.

Expedited Forwarding PHB – the key ingredient in DiffServ model for providing a
low-loss, low-latency, low-jitter and assured bandwidth service.

Assured Forwarding PHB – defines a method by which BAs can be given different
forwarding assurances.

Default PHB – specifies that a packet marked with a DSCP value of “000000” gets
the traditional best effort service from a DS-compliant node.
VoIP is extremely bandwidth- and delay-sensitive. QoS is a major issue in VoIP
implementations, regarding how to guarantee that packet traffic not to be delayed or
dropped due to interference from other lower priority traffic. VoIP can guarantee
high-quality QoS only if the voice and the SIP packets are given priority over other kinds
of network traffic. IP phones support the DiffServ model of QoS.
Voice QoS
For VoIP transmissions to be intelligible to receivers, voice packets should not be
dropped, excessively delayed, made to suffer varying delay. DiffServ model can
guarantee high-quality voice transmission when the voice packets are configured to a
higher DSCP value.
166
Configuring Advanced Features
SIP QoS
SIP protocol is used for creating, modifying and terminating two-party or multi-party
sessions. To ensure good voice quality, SIP packets emanating from IP phones should be
configured with a high transmission priority.
DSCPs for voice and SIP packets can be specified respectively.
Note
The DSCP value of voice traffic in the received LLDP packet will override the manual
configuration.
Procedure
DSCPs for voice packets and SIP packets can be configured using the configuration files
or locally.
Configure the DSCPs for voice
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
packets and SIP packets.
For more information, refer to
QoS on page 326.
Configure the DSCPs for voice
packets and SIP packets.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=network-adv&q=load
To configure DSCPs for voice packets and SIP packets via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
Enter the desired value in the Voice QoS (0~63) field.
167
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
3.
Enter the desired value in the SIP Qos (0~63) field.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after reboot.
5.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
Network Address Translation (NAT) is essentially a translation table that maps public IP
address and port combinations to private ones. This reduces the need for a large
number of public IP addresses. The NAT feature ensures security since each outgoing or
incoming request must first go through a translation process. But in the VoIP environment,
NAT breaks end-to-end connectivity.
NAT Traversal
NAT traversal is a general term for techniques that establish and maintain IP
connections traversing NAT gateways, typically required for client-to-client networking
applications, especially for VoIP deployments. STUN is one of the NAT traversal
techniques supported by IP phones.
STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs)
STUN is a network protocol, used in NAT traversal for applications of real-time voice,
video, messaging, and other interactive IP communications. The STUN protocol allows
applications to operate behind a NAT to discover the presence of the network address
translator, and to obtain the mapped (public) IP address and port number that the NAT
has allocated for the UDP connections to remote parties. The protocol requires
168
Configuring Advanced Features
assistance from a third-party network server (STUN server) usually located on public
Internet. The IP phone can be configured to act as a STUN client, sending exploratory
STUN messages to the STUN server. The STUN server uses those messages to determine
the public IP address and port used, and then informs the client.
The NAT traversal and STUN server are configurable on a per-line basis.
Procedure
NAT traversal and STUN server can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure NAT traversal and
STUN server on the IP phone.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Network Address Translation on
page 327.
Configure the NAT traversal
and STUN server on the IP
phone.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-register&q=load
&acc=0
To configure the NAT traversal and STUN server via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Select STUN from the pull-down list of NAT.
4.
Enter the IP address or the domain name in the STUN Server field.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
169
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is an Internet-standard protocol for
managing devices on IP networks. It is used mostly in network management systems to
monitor network-attached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention.
SNMP exposes management data in the form of variables on the managed systems,
which describe the system configuration, and can then be queried by the managing
applications. The variables accessible via SNMP are organized in hierarchies, which
are described by Management Information Bases (MIBs).
IP phones only support SNMPv1 and SNMPv2. They act as SNMP clients, receiving
requests from the SNMP server. The SNMP server may send requests from any available
source port to the configured port on the client, while the client responds to the source
port on the SNMP server. IP phones only support the GET request from the SNMP server.
SNMP is not applicable to the SIP-T42G IP phone.
The following table lists the basic object identifiers (OIDs) supported by IP phones:
MIB
OID
Description
The textual identification of the contact
person for the IP phone, together with
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.1.0
the contact information.
For example, Sysadmin
(root@localhost)
An administratively-assigned name for
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.2.0
the IP phone. If the name is unknown,
the value is a zero-length string.
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.3.0
The physical location of the IP phone.
The time (in milliseconds) since the
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.4.0
network management portion of the
system was last re-initialized.
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.5.0
The firmware version of the IP phone.
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.6.0
The hardware version of the IP phone.
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.7.0
The IP phone’s model.
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.8.0
The MAC address of the IP phone.
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.9.0
The IP address of the IP phone.
The target version to which the current
YEALINK-MIB
1.3.6.1.2.1.37459.2.1.10.0
version is automatically updated.
Format:
MacVersion[*]ComVersion[*]
170
Configuring Advanced Features
MIB
OID
Description
For example,
MacVersion[0.0.0.1]ComVersion[0.0.0.1]
Procedure
SNMP can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure SNMP on the IP
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
phone.
For more information, refer to
SNMP on page 328.
Configure SNMP.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=network-adv&q=load
To configure SNMP via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
In the SNMP block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active.
3.
Enter the desired port in the Port field.
4.
Enter IP address(es) (IPv4 or IPv6) or domain name of the SNMP server in the
Trusted Address field.
Multiple addresses are separated by space.
171
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after reboot.
6.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
IEEE 802.1X authentication is an IEEE standard for Port-based Network Access Control
(PNAC), part of the IEEE 802.1 group of networking protocols. It offers an authentication
mechanism for devices to connect to a LAN or WLAN. The 802.1X authentication involves
three parties: a supplicant, an authenticator and an authentication ser ver. The
supplicant is the IP phone that wishes to attach to the LAN or WLAN. With 802.1X
port-based authentication, the IP phone provides credentials, such as user name and
password, to the authenticator, and then the authenticator forwards the credentials to
the authentication server for verification. If the authentication server determines the
credentials are valid, the IP phone is allowed to access resources located on the
protected side of the network.
IP phones support protocols EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, PEAP-MSCHAPv2 and
EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2 for 802.1X authentication.
Procedure
802.1X authentication can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the 802.1X
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
authentication on the IP phone.
For more information, refer to
802.1X on page 329.
Configure the 802.1X
authentication on the IP phone.
Web User Interface
Local
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=network-adv&q=load
Phone User Interface
Configure the 802.1X
authentication on the IP phone.
To configure the 802.1X via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Advanced.
2.
In the 802.1x block, select the desired protocol from the pull-down list of Mode
802.1x.
a) If you select EAP-MD5:
1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
172
Configuring Advanced Features
2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
b) If you select EAP-TLS:
1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
2) Leave the MD5 Password field blank.
3) In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to locate the desired CA certificate
(*.pem,*.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.
4) In the Device Certificates field, click Browse to locate the desired client
certificate (*.pem or *.cer) from your local system.
173
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
5) Click Upload to upload the certificates.
c) If you select PEAP-MSCHAPv2:
1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
3) In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to locate the desired certificate
(*.pem,*.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.
4) Click Upload to upload the certificate.
d) If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2:
174
Configuring Advanced Features
1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
3) In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to locate the desired certificate
(*.pem,*.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.
4) Click Upload to upload the certificate.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after reboot.
4.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure the 802.1X via phone user interface after:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->802.1x Settings.
2.
Press
or
, or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the 802.1x
Mode field.
a) If you select EAP-MD5:
1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
2) Enter the password for authentication in the Password field.
b) If you select EAP-TLS:
1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
2) Leave the Password field blank.
c) If you select PEAP-MSCHAPV2:
1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
2) Enter the password for authentication in the Password field.
d) If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPV2:
175
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
2) Enter the password for authentication in the Password field.
3.
Click Save to accept the change.
The IP phone reboots automatically to make the settings effective after a period of
time.
TR-069 is a technical specification, defined by the Broadband Forum, which defines a
mechanism that encompasses secure auto-configuration of a CPE (Customer-Premises
Equipment), as well as incorporates other CPE management functions into a common
framework. TR-069 uses common transport mechanisms (HTTP and HTTPS) for
communication between CPE and ACS (Auto Configuration Servers). The HTTP(S)
messages contain XML-RPC methods defined in the standard for configuration and
management of the CPE.
TR-069 is intended to support a variety of functionalities to manage a collection of CPEs,
including the following primary capabilities:

Auto-configuration and dynamic service provisioning

Software or firmware image management

Status and performance monitoring

Diagnostics
TR-069 is not applicable to SIP-T42G and SIP-T41P IP phones.
The following table provides a description of RPC methods supported by IP phones.
RPC Method
GetRPCMethods
SetParameterValues
GetParameterValues
GetParameterNames
GetParameterAttributes
SetParameterAttributes
Reboot
176
Description
This method is used to discover the set of methods
supported by the CPE.
This method is used to modify the value of one or
more CPE parameters.
This method is used to obtain the value of one or
more CPE parameters.
This method is used to discover the parameters
accessible on a particular CPE.
This method is used to read the attributes associated
with one or more CPE parameters.
This method is used to modify attributes associated
with one or more CPE parameters.
This method causes the CPE to reboot.
Configuring Advanced Features
RPC Method
Description
This method is used to cause the CPE to download a
specified file from the designated location.
File types supported by IP phones are:
Download

Firmware Image

Configuration File
This method is used to cause the CPE to upload a
specified file to the designated location.
File types supported by IP phones are:
Upload

Configuration File

Log File
This method is used to request the CPE to schedule a
ScheduleInform
one-time Inform method call (separate from its
periodic Inform method calls) sometime in the future.
FactoryReset
This method resets the CPE to its factory default state.
This method informs the ACS of the completion
(either successful or unsuccessful) of a file transfer
TransferComplete
initiated by an earlier Download or Upload method
call.
This method is used to add a new instance of an
AddObject
object defined on the CPE.
This method is used to remove a particular instance
DeleteObject
of an object.
Procedure
TR-069 can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure theTR-069 feature.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
TR-069 on page 331.
Configure the TR-069 feature.
Navigate to:
Local
Web User Interface
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-preference&q=lo
ad
To configure TR-069 via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->TR069.
2.
Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable TR069.
177
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
3.
Enter the user name and password authenticated by the ACS in the ACS Username
and ACS Password fields.
4.
Enter the URL of the ACS in the ACS URL field.
5.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Enable Periodic Inform.
6.
Enter the desired time in the Periodic Inform Interval (seconds) field.
7.
Enter the user name and password authenticated by the IP phone in the
Connection Request Username and Connection Request Password fields.
8.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
IPv6 is the next generation network layer protocol, designed as a replacement for the
current IPv4 protocol. IPv6 was developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
to deal with the long-anticipated problem of IPv4 address exhaustion. IPv6 uses a
128-bit address, consisting of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by
colons. VoIP network based on IPv6 can ensure QoS, a set of service requirements to
deliver performance guarantee while transporting traffic over the network.
IP phones support IPv4 only addressing mode, IPv6 only addressing mode, as well as an
IPv4/IPv6 dual stack addressing mode.
IPv6 Address Assignment Method
Supported IPv6 address assignment methods:

Manual Assignment: An IPv6 address and other configuration parameters (e.g.,
DNS server) for the IP phone can be statically configured by an administrator.

Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC): SLAAC is one of the most convenient
methods to assign IP addresses to IPv6 nodes. SLAAC requires no manual
configuration of the IP phone, minimal (if any) configuration of routers, and no
additional servers. To use IPv6 SLAAC, the IP phone must be connected to a
178
Configuring Advanced Features
network with at least one IPv6 router connected. This router is configured by the
network administrator and sends out Router Advertisement announcements onto
the link. These announcements can allow the on-link connected IP phone to
configure itself with IPv6 address, as specified in RFC 4862.

Stateful DHCPv6: The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) has
been standardized by the IETF through RFC3315. DHCPv6 enables DHCP servers to
pass configuration parameters such as IPv6 network addresses to IPv6 nodes. It
offers the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and
additional configuration flexibility. This protocol is a stateful counterpart to “IPv6
Stateless Address Autoconfiguration”, and can be used separately or in addition to
the stateless autoconfiguration to obtain configuration parameters.
Note
SIP-T42G and SIP-T41P IP phones do not support the stateful DHCPv6 address assignment
method.
If the IP phone enables the SLAAC and DHCPv6 features simultaneously, the phone will
obtain the IP address via SLAAC and obtain other network parameters via DHCPv6.
Procedure
IPv6 can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the IPv6 address
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
assignment method.
For more information, refer to
IPv6 on page 335.
Configure the IPv6 address
assignment method.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=network&q=load
To configure IPv6 address assignment method via web user interface:
1.
Click on Network->Basic.
2.
Select the desired address mode (IPv6 or IPv4&IPv6) from the pull-down list of
Mode (IPv4/IPv6).
3.
In the IPv6 Config block, mark the DHCP or the Static IP Address radio box.
179
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
If you mark the Static IP Address radio box, configure the IPv6 address and other
configuration parameters in the corresponding fields.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after reboot.
5.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure SLAAC feature via web user interface (not applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P):
1.
180
Click on Network->Advanced.
Configuring Advanced Features
2.
In the ICMPv6 Status block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of
Active.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure IPv6 address via phone user interface:
1.
Press Menu->Advanced (password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port.
2.
Press
or
to select the desired address mode from the IP Address Mode
field.
3.
Press
or
to highlight IPv6 and press the Enter soft key.
4.
Press
or
to select the desired IPv6 address assignment method.
If you select the Static IP, configure the IPv6 address and other configuration
parameters in the corresponding fields.
5.
Press the Save soft key to accept the change
The IP phone reboots automatically to make the settings effective after a period of
time.
181
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
182
Configuring Audio Features
This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following
audio features:

Headset Prior

Dual Headset

Audio Codecs

Acoustic Clarity Technology
Headset prior allows users to use headset preferentially if a headset is physically
connected to the IP phone. This feature is especially useful for permanent or full-time
headset users.
Procedure
Headset prior can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure headset prior.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Headset Prior on page 338.
Configure headset prior.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
To configure headset prior via web user interface:
1.
Click on Features->General Information.
183
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Headset Prior.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Dual headset allows users to use two headsets on one IP phone. To use this feature,
users need to physically connect two headsets to the headset and handset jacks
respectively. Once the phone connects to a call, the user with the headset connected to
the headset jack has full-duplex capabilities, while the user with the headset connected
to the handset jack is only able to listen.
Procedure
Dual headset can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure dual headset.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Dual Headset on page 338.
Configure dual headset.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=features-general&q=load
To configure dual headset via web user interface:
1.
184
Click on Features->General Information.
Configuring Audio Features
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Dual-Headset.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
CODEC is an abbreviation of COmpress-DECompress, capable of coding or decoding a
digital data stream or signal by implementing an algorithm. The object of the algorithm
is to represent the high-fidelity audio signal with minimum number of bits while retaining
the quality. This can effectively reduce the frame size and the bandwidth required for
audio transmission.
The default codecs used on IP phones are summarized in the following table:
Codec
Algorithm
Bit Rate
Sample Rate
Packetization Time
PCMA
G.711 a-law
64 Kbps
8 Ksps
20ms
PCMU
G.711 u-law
64 Kbps
8 Ksps
20ms
G729
G.729
8 Kbps
8 Ksps
20ms
G722
G.722
64 Kbps
16 Ksps
20ms
In addition to the codecs introduced above, IP phones also support codecs: G723_53,
G723_63, G726_16, G726_24, G726_32, G726_40, GSM and iLBC (for SIP-T46G only).
Codecs are configurable on a per-line basis, instead of using defaults. You can also
configure the priorities for these desired codecs. The attribute “rtpmap” is used to
define a mapping from RTP payload codes to a codec, clock rate and other encoding
parameters.
185
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
The corresponding attributes of the codec are listed as follows:
Codec
PCMU
PCMA
G729
G722
G723_53
G723_63
G726_16
G726_24
G726_32
G726_40
GSM
iLBC (for
SIP-T46G
only)
Configuration Methods
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Configuration Files
Web User Interface
Priority
RTPmap
1
0
2
8
3
18
4
9
0
4
0
4
0
112
0
102
0
99
0
104
0
97
0
102
Packetization Time
Ptime (Packetization Time) is measurement of the duration (in milliseconds) of the audio
data in each RTP packet sent to the destination, and defines how much network
bandwidth is used for the RTP stream transfer. Before establishing a conversation, codec
and ptime are negotiated through SIP signaling. The valid values of ptime range from
10 to 60, in increments of 10 milliseconds. The default ptime is 20ms. You can also
disable the ptime negotiation.
186
Configuring Audio Features
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the codecs to use on
a per-line basis.
Configure the priority and
rtpmap for the enabled codec.
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Audio Codecs on page 339.
Configure the ptime.
For more information, refer to
Audio Codecs on page 339.
Configure the codecs and
adjust the priority of the
enabled codecs on a per-line
basis.
Local
Web User Interface
Configure the ptime.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-codec&q=load&
acc=0
To configure the codecs and adjust the priority of the enabled codecs on a per-line
basis via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Codec.
4.
Select the desired codec from the Disable Codecs column and click
.
The selected codec appears in the Enable Codecs column.
5.
Repeat the step 4 to add more codecs to the Enable Codecs column.
6.
Click
to remove the codec from the Enable Codecs column.
187
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
7.
Click
or
to adjust the priority of the enabled codecs.
8.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To configure the Ptime on a per-line basis via web user interface:
188
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of PTime (ms).
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Audio Features
Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) is used to remove acoustic echo from a voice
communication in order to improve the voice quality. It also increases the capacity
achieved through silence suppression by preventing echo from traveling across a
network. IP phones employ advanced AEC for hands-free operation. Echo cancellation
is achieved using the echo canceller.
Procedure
AEC can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure AEC.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Acoustic Echo Cancellation on
page 342.
Configure AEC.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-voice&q=load
To configure AEC via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Voice.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of ECHO.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
189
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Voice Activity Detection (VAD) is used in speech processing to detect the presence or
absence of human speech. When detecting period of “silence”, VAD replaces that
silence efficiently with special packets that indicate silence is occurring. It can facilitate
speech processing, and used to deactivate some processes during non-speech section
of an audio session. VAD can avoid unnecessary coding or transmission of silence
packets in VoIP applications, saving on computation and network bandwidth.
Procedure
VAD can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure VAD.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Voice Activity Detection on
page 343.
Configure VAD.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-voice&q=load
To configure VAD via web user interface:
190
1.
Click on Settings->Voice.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of VAD.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Configuring Audio Features
Comfort Noise Generation (CNG) is used to generate background noise for voice
communications during periods of silence in a conversation. It is part of the silence
suppression or VAD handling for VoIP technology. CNG, in conjunction with VAD
algorithms, quickly responds when periods of silence occur and inserts artificial noise
until voice activity resumes. The insertion of artificial noise gives the illusion of a constant
transmission stream, so that background sound is consistent throughout the call and the
listener does not think the line has released. The purpose of VAD and CNG is to maintain
an acceptable perceived QoS while simultaneously keeping transmission costs and
bandwidth usage as low as possible.
Procedure
CNG can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure CNG.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Comfort Noise Generation on
page 343.
Configure CNG.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-voice&q=load
To configure CNG via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Voice.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of CNG.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
191
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Jitter buffer is a shared data area where voice packets can be collected, stored, and
sent to the voice processor in even intervals. Jitter is a term indicating variations in
packet arrival time, can occur because of network congestion, timing drift or route
changes. The jitter buffer, located at the receiving end of the voice connection,
intentionally delays the arriving packets so that the end user experiences a clear
connection with very little sound distortion. IP phones support two types of jitter buffers:
static and dynamic. A static jitter buffer adds the fixed delay to voice packets. You can
configure the delay time for the static jitter buffer on IP phones. A dynamic jitter buffer is
capable of adapting the changes in the network's delay. The range of the delay time for
the dynamic jitter buffer added to packets can be also configured on IP phones.
Procedure
Jitter buffer can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the mode of jitter
buffer and the delay time for
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
jitter buffer.
For more information, refer to
Jitter Buffer on page 343.
Configure the mode of jitter
buffer and the delay time for
Local
Web User Interface
jitter buffer.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-voice&q=load
To configure Jitter Buffer via web user interface:
192
1.
Click on Settings->Voice.
2.
Mark the desired radio box in the Type field.
3.
Enter the minimum delay time for adaptive jitter buffer in the Min Delay field.
4.
Enter the maximum delay time for adaptive jitter buffer in the Max Delay field.
Configuring Audio Features
5.
Enter the fixed delay time for fixed jitter buffer in the Normal field.
6.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
193
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
194
Configuring Security Features
This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following
security-related features:

Transport Layer Security

Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol

Encrypting Configuration Files
TLS is a commonly-used protocol for providing communications privacy and managing
the security of message transmission, allowing IP phones to communicate with other
remote parties and connect to the HTTPS URL for provisioning in a way that is designed
to prevent eavesdropping and tampering.
TLS protocol is composed of two layers: TLS Record Protocol and TLS Handshake
Protocol. The TLS Record Protocol completes the actual data transmission and ensures
the integrity and privacy of the data. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and
client to authenticate each other and negotiate an encryption algorithm and
cryptographic keys before data is exchanged.
The TLS protocol uses asymmetric encryption for authentication of key exchange,
symmetric encryption for confidentiality, and message authentication codes for
integrity.

Symmetric encryption: For symmetric encryption, the encryption key and the
corresponding decryption key can be told by each other. In most cases, the
encryption key is the same as the decryption key.

Asymmetric encryption: For asymmetric encryption, each user has a pair of
cryptographic keys – a public encryption key and a private decryption key. The
information encrypted by the public key can only be decrypted by the
corresponding private key and vice versa. Usually, the receiver keeps its private
key. The public key is known by the sender, so the sender sends the information
encrypted by the known public key, and then the receiver uses the private key to
decrypt it.
SIP-T4X IP phones support TLS version 1.0. A cipher suite is a named combination of
authentication, encryption, and message authentication code (MAC) algorithms used
to negotiate the security settings for a network connection using the TLS/SSL network
protocol. SIP-T4X IP phones support the following cipher suites for TLS 1.0:

DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA

DHE-DSS-AES256-SHA
195
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones

AES256-SHA

EDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA

EDH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA

DES-CBC3-SHA

DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA

DHE-DSS-AES128-SHA

AES128-SHA

IDEA-CBC-SHA

DHE-DSS-RC4-SHA

RC4-SHA

RC4-MD5

EXP1024-DHE-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA

EXP1024-DES-CBC-SHA

EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA

EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA

DES-CBC-SHA

EXP1024-DHE-DSS-RC4-SHA

EXP1024-RC4-SHA

EXP1024-RC4-MD5

EXP-EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA

EXP-EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA

EXP-DES-CBC-SHA

EXP-RC4-MD5
The following figure illustrates the TLS messages exchanged between the IP phone and
TLS server to establish an encrypted communication channel:
Step1: IP phone sends “Client Hello” message proposing SSL options.
Step2: Server responds with “Server Hello” message selecting the SSL options, sends its
public key information in “Server Key Exchange” message and concludes its part of the
196
Configuring Security Features
negotiation with “Server Hello Done” message.
Step3: The IP phone sends session key information (encrypted with server’s public key)
in the “Client Key Exchange” message.
Step4: Server sends “Change Cipher Spec” message to activate the negotiated options
for all future messages it will send.
IP phones can encrypt SIP with TLS, which is called SIPS. When TLS is enabled for an
account, the SIP message of this account will be encrypted, and a lock icon will appear
on the LCD screen after the successful TLS negotiation.
Certificates
The IP phone can serve as a TLS client or a TLS server. The TLS requires the following
security certificates to perform the TLS handshake:

Trusted Certificate: When the IP phone requests a TLS connection with a server, the
IP phone should verify the certificate sent by the server to decide whether it is
trusted based on the trusted certificates list. The IP phone has 30 built-in trusted
certificates. You can upload up to 10 custom certificates to the IP phone. The format
of the certificates must be *.pem, *.cer, *.crt and *.der.

Server Certificate: When the other client requests a TLS connection with the IP
phone, the IP phone sends the server certificate to the client for authentication. The
IP phone has one built-in server certificate. The built-in server certificate will not be
deleted in any case. You can only upload one custom server certificate to the IP
phone. The format of the certificates must be *.pem and *.cer. The custom
certificate will be overridden by a new one.
Whether IP phone authenticates the server certificate can be specified based on the
trusted certificates list. The trusted certificates list and the server certificates list contain
the default and custom certificates. You can specify the type of certificates the IP phone
accepts: default certificates, custom certificates, or all certificates. Common Name
Validation feature enables the IP phone to mandatorily validate the common name of
the certificate sent by the connecting server.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure TLS on a per-line
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
basis.
For more information, refer to
TLS on page 345.
197
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Configure the trusted
certificates feature.
Configure the server certificates
feature.
For more information, refer to
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
TLS on page 345.
Upload the trusted certificates.
Upload the server certificates.
For more information, refer to
Uploading Certificates on page
345.
Configure TLS on a per-line
basis.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=account-register&q=load
&acc=0
Configure the trusted
certificates feature.
Local
Web User Interface
Upload the trusted certificates.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=trusted-cert&q=load
Configure the server certificates
feature.
Upload the server certificates.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=server-cert&q=load
To configure the trusted certificates feature via web user interface:
198
1.
Click on Security->Trusted Certificates.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Only Accept Trusted Certificates.
3.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Common Name Validation.
Configuring Security Features
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of CA Certificates.
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after reboot.
6.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To configure TLS on a per-line basis via web user interface:
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Select TLS from the pull-down list of the Transport.
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
To upload a trusted certificate via web user interface:
1.
Click on Security->Trusted Certificates.
199
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Click Browse to locate the certificate (*.pem,*.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local
system.
3.
Click Upload to upload the certificate.
To configure the server certificates feature via web user interface:
1.
Click on Security->Server Certificates.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Device Certificates.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after reboot.
4.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
To upload a server certificate via web user interface:
1.
200
Click on Security->Server Certificates.
Configuring Security Features
2.
Click Browse to locate the certificate (*.pem or *.cer) from your local system.
3.
Click Upload to upload the certificate.
The dialog box pops up to prompt “Success: The Server Certificate has been
loaded! Rebooting, please wait…”.
Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) encrypts RTP streams during VoIP phone
calls to avoid interception and eavesdropping. The parties participating in the call must
enable SRTP simultaneously. When this feature is enabled on both phones, the
encryption algorithm utilized for the session is negotiated between IP phones. This
negotiation process is compliant with RFC 4568.
When a user places a call on the enabled SRTP phone, the IP phone sends an INVITE
message with the RTP encryption algorithm to the destination phone.
Example of the RTP encryption algorithm carried in the SDP of the INVITE message:
m=audio 11780 RTP/SAVP 0 8 18 9 101
a=crypto:1 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
inline:NzFlNTUwZDk2OGVlOTc3YzNkYTkwZWVkMTM1YWFj
a=crypto:2 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32
inline:NzkyM2FjNzQ2ZDgxYjg0MzQwMGVmMGUxMzdmNWFm
a=crypto:3 F8_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 inline:NDliMWIzZGE1ZTAwZjA5ZGFhNjQ5YmEANTMzYzA0
a=rtpmap:0 PCMU/8000
a=rtpmap:8 PCMA/8000
a=rtpmap:18 G729/8000
a=fmtp:18 annexb=no
a=rtpmap:9 G722/8000
a=fmtp:101 0-15
a=rtpmap:101 telephone-event/8000
a=ptime:20
a=sendrecv
201
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
The callee receives the INVITE message with the RTP encryption algorithm, and then
answers the call by responding with a 200 OK message which carries the negotiated
RTP encryption algorithm.
Example of the RTP encryption algorithm carried in the SDP of the 200 OK message:
m=audio 11780 RTP/SAVP 0 101
a=rtpmap:0 PCMU/8000
a=rtpmap:101 telephone-event/8000
a=crypto:1 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
inline:NGY4OGViMDYzZjQzYTNiOTNkOWRiYzRlMjM0Yzcz
a=sendrecv
a=ptime:20
a=fmtp:101 0-15
SRTP feature is configurable on a per-line basis. When SRTP is enabled on both IP
phones, RTP streams will be encrypted, and a lock icon appears on the LCD screen of
each IP phone after successful negotiation.
Note
If you enable SRTP, then you should also enable TLS. This ensures the security of SRTP
encryption. For more information on TLS, refer to Transport Layer Security on page 195 .
Procedure
SRTP can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
Configure SRTP feature on a
Configuration File
<MAC>.cfg
per-line basis.
For more information, refer to
SRTP on page 348.
Configure SRTP feature on a
per-line basis.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet
?p=account-adv&q=load&acc=
0
To configure SRTP via web user interface:
202
1.
Click on Account.
2.
Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
3.
Click on Advanced.
Configuring Security Features
4.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of RTP Encryption (SRTP).
5.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Encrypted configuration files can be downloaded from the provisioning server to
protect against unauthorized access and tampering of sensitive information (e.g., login
passwords, registration information). Yealink provides configuration encryption tool for
encrypting configuration files. The encryption tool encrypts plaintext
<y0000000000xx>.cfg and <MAC>.cfg files (one by one or in batch) using 16-character
symmetric keys (the same or different keys for configuration files) and generates
encrypted configuration files with the same file name as before. This tool also encrypts
the plaintext 16-character symmetric keys using built-in key, which is the same as the
one built in the IP phone, and generates new files named as <xx_Security>.enc (xx
indicates the name of the configuration file, for example, y000000000028_Security.enc
for y000000000028.cfg file). This tool generates another new file named as Aeskey.txt to
store the plaintext 16-character symmetric keys for each configuration file.
For a Microsoft Windows platform, you can use Yealink-supplied encryption tool
"Config_Encrypt_Tool.exe" to encrypt the <y0000000000xx>.cfg and <MAC>.cfg files
respectively.
Note
Yealink also supplies a configuration encryption tool (yealinkencrypt) for Linux platform if
applicable. For more information, refer to Yealink Configuration Encryption Tool User
Guide.
203
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
For security, administrator should upload encrypted configuration files,
<y0000000000xx_Security>.enc and/or <MAC_Security>.enc files to the root directory
of the provisioning server. During auto provisioning, the IP phone requests to download
<y0000000000xx>.cfg file first. If the downloaded configuration file is encrypted, the
phone will request to download <y0000000000xx_Security>.enc file (if enabled) and
decrypt <y0000000000xx>.cfg file into the plaintext key (e.g., key2) using the built-in
key (e.g., key1). Then the IP phone decrypts <y0000000000xx>.cfg file using key2. After
decryption, the IP phone resolves configuration files and updates configuration settings
onto the IP phone system.
The way the IP phone processes the <MAC>.cfg file is the same as the
<y0000000000xx>.cfg file.
Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files
To encrypt the <y0000000000xx>.cfg file:
1.
Double click “Config_Encrypt_Tool.exe” to start the application tool.
The screenshot of the main page is shown as below:
2.
Click Browse to locate configuration file(s) (e.g., y000000000028.cfg) from your
local system in the Select File(s) field.
To select multiply configuration files, you can select the first file and then press and
hold the Ctrl key and select the next files.
3.
(Optional.) Click Browse to locate the target directory from your local system in the
Target Directory field.
4.
(Optional.) Mark the desired radio box in the AES Model field.
If you mark the Manual radio box, you can enter an AES key in the AES KEY field or
click Re-Generate to generate an AES key in the AES KEY field. The configuration
file(s) will be encrypted using the AES key in the AES KEY field.
If you mark the Auto Generate radio box, the configuration file(s) will be encrypted
using random AES key. The AES keys of configuration files are different.
Note
204
AES keys must be 16 characters and the supported characters contain: 0 ~ 9, A ~ Z, a ~
z.
Configuring Security Features
5.
Click Encrypt to encrypt the configuration file(s).
6.
Click OK.
The target directory will be automatically opened. You can find the encrypted CFG
file(s), encrypted key file(s) and an Aeskey.txt file storing plaintext AES key(s).
Procedure
Encryption method and AES keys can be configured using the configuration files or
locally.
Configure the encryption
method and AES keys.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Configuring Encryption Method
on page 348.
Configure the AES keys.
Local
Web User Interface
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-autop&q=load
205
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
To configure the AES keys via web user interface:
206
1.
Click on Settings->Auto Provision.
2.
Enter the values in the Common AES Key and MAC-Oriented AES Key fields.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Upgrading Firmware
This chapter provides information about upgrading the IP phone firmware. Two methods
of firmware upgrade:

Manually, from the local system.

Automatically, from the provisioning server.
The following table lists the associated firmware name for each IP phone model (X is
replaced by the actual firmware version).
Note
IP Phone Model
Associated Firmware Name
SIP-T46G
28.x.x.x.rom
SIP-T42G
29.x.x.x.rom
SIP-T41P
36.x.x.x.rom
You can download the latest firmware online:
http://www.yealink.com/DocumentDownload.aspx?CateId=142&flag=142.
Upgrade via Web User Interface
To manually upgrade firmware via web user interface, you need to store the firmware to
the local system in advance.
To upgrade firmware manually via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Upgrade.
2.
Click Browse.
3.
Select the firmware from the local system.
4.
Click Upgrade.
207
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
A dialog box pops up to prompt “Firmware of the SIP Phone will be updated. It will
take 5 minutes to complete. Please don't power off!”.
5.
Click OK to confirm the upgrade.
Do not unplug the network and power cables when the IP phone is upgrading firmware.
Note
Do not close the browser when the IP phone is upgrading firmware via web user
interface.
Upgrade Firmware from the Provisioning Server
IP phones support to use the FTP, TFTP, HTTP, and HTTPS protocols to download the
configuration files and firmware from the provisioning server, and then upgrade
firmware automatically.
IP phones can download firmware stored on the provisioning server in one of two ways:

Check for both configuration files and firmware stored on the provisioning server
during booting up.

Automatically check for configuration files and firmware at a fixed interval or
specific time.
Method of checking for configuration files and firmware is configurable.
Procedure
Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally.
Configure the way for the IP
phone to check for
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
configuration files.
Specify the access URL of the
firmware.
208
Upgrading Firmware
For more information, refer to
Upgrading Firmware on page
350.
Configure the way for the IP
phone to check for
Local
Web User Interface
configuration files.
Navigate to:
http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl
et?p=settings-autop&q=load
To configure the way for the IP phone to check for new configuration files via web user
interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Auto Provision.
2.
Make the desired change.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
When the “Power On” is set to On, the IP phone will check for both firmware and
configuration files stored on the provisioning server during booting up.
209
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
210
Resource Files
When configuring particular features, you may need to upload resource files (e.g., local
contact directory, remote phone book) to the IP phone. The resources files can be local
contact directory, remote phone book and so on. Ask Yealink field application engineer
for resource file templates. If the resource file is to be used for all IP phones of the same
model, the resource file access URL is best specified in the <y0000000000xx>.cfg file.
However, if you want to specify the desired phone to use the resource file, the resource
file access URL should be specified in the <MAC>.cfg file.
This chapter provides the detailed information on how to customize the following
resource files and specify the access URL:

Replace Rule Template

Dial-now Template

Softkey Layout Template

Local Contact File

Remote XML Phone Book

Specifying the Access URL of Resource Files
The replace rule template helps with the creation of multiple replace rules. The existing
replace rules on the phones will be overwritten by the downloaded replace rules. After
setup, you need to place the replace rule template to the provisioning server and
specify the access URL in the configuration files.
When editing a replace rule template file, learn the following:

<dialrule> indicates the start of the template file and </dialrule> indicates the
end of the template file.

Create replace rules between <dialrule> and </dialrule>.

When specifying the desired line(s) to apply the replace rule, the valid values are 0
and line ID. The digit 0 stands for all lines. Multiple line IDs are separated by
comma.

At most 100 replace rules can be added to the IP phone.

The expression syntax in the replace rule template is the same as introduced in the
section Creating Dial Plan on page 25.
211
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Procedure
Use the following procedures to customize a replace rule template.
To customize a replace rule template:
1.
Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
2.
Add the following string to the template, each starting on a separate line:
<Data Prefix=”” Replace=”” LineID=””/>
Where:
Prefix=”” specifies the numbers to be replaced.
Replace=”” specifies the alternate string instead of what the user enters.
LineID=”” specifies the desired line(s) for this rule. When leaving it blank, this
replace rule will apply to all lines.
3.
Specify the values within double quotes.
4.
Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server.
The following is an example of a replace rule file:
<dialrule>
<Data Prefix="1" Replace="05928665234" LineID=""/>
<Data Prefix="2(xx)" Replace="002$1" LineID="0"/>
<Data Prefix="5([6-9])(.)" Replace="3$2" LineID="1,2,3"/>
<Data Prefix="0(.)" Replace="9$1" LineID="2"/>
<Data Prefix="1009" Replace="05921009" LineID="1"/>
</dialrule>
The dial-now template helps with the creation of multiple dial-now rules. After setup,
you need to place the dial-now template to the provisioning server and specify the
access URL in the configuration files.
When editing a dial-now template, learn the following:

<dialnow> indicates the start of a template and </dialnow> indicates the end of
a template.

Create dial-now rules between <dialnow> and </dialnow>.

When specifying the desired line(s) for the dial-now rule, the valid values are 0 and
line ID. 0 stands for all lines. Multiple line IDs are separated by comma.

At most 100 dial-now rules can be added to the IP phone.

The expression syntax in the dial-now rule template is the same as introduced in
the section Creating Dial Plan on page 25.
212
Resource Files
Procedure
Use the following procedures to customize a dial-now template.
To customize a dial-now template:
1.
Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
2.
Add the following string to the template, each starting on a separate line:
<Data DialNowRule="" LineID=""/>
Where:
DialNowRule="" specifies the dial-now rule.
LineID="" specifies the desired line(s) for this rule. When leaving it blank, this rule
will apply to all lines.
3.
Specify the values within double quotes.
4.
Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server.
The following is an example of a dial-now template:
<dialnow>
<Data DialNowRule="1234" LineID="1"/>
<Data DialNowRule="52[0-6]" LineID="1"/>
<Data DialNowRule="xxxxxx" LineID=""/>
</dialnow>
The softkey layout template allows assigning different soft key layouts to different call
states. The call states include CallFailed, CallIn, Connecting, Dialing, RingBack and
Talking. After setup, place the templates to the provisioning server and specify the
access URL in the configuration files.
When editing a softkey layout template, learn the following:

<Call States> indicates the start of a template and </Call States> indicates the
end of a template. For example, <CallFailed></CallFailed>.

<Disable> indicates the start of the disabled soft key list and </Disable> indicates
the end of the soft key list, the disabled soft keys are not displayed on the LCD
screen.

Create disabled soft keys between <Disable> and </Disable>.

<Enable> indicates the start of the enabled soft key list and </Enable> indicates
the end of the soft key list, the enabled soft keys are displayed on the LCD screen.

Create enabled soft keys between <Enable> and </Enable>.

<Default> indicates the start of the default soft key list and </Default> indicates
213
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
the end of the default soft key list, the default soft keys are displayed on the LCD
screen by default.
Procedure
Use the following procedures to customize a softkey layout template.
To customize a softkey layout template:
1.
Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
2.
For each soft key that you want to enable, add the following string to the file. Each
starts on a separate line:
<Key Type=""/>
Where:
Key Type="" specifies the enabled soft key (This value cannot be blank).
For each disabled soft key and each default soft key that you want to add, add the
same string introduced above.
3.
Specify the values within double quotes.
4.
Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server.
The following is an example of the CallFailed template file:
<CallFailed>
<Disable>
<Key Type="Empty"/>
<Key Type="Switch"/>
<Key Type="Cancel"/>
</Disable>
<Enable>
<Key Type="NewCall"/>
<Key Type="Empty"/>
<Key Type="Empty"/>
<Key Type="Empty"/>
</Enable>
<Default>
<Key Type="NewCall"/>
<Key Type="Empty"/>
<Key Type="Empty"/>
<Key Type="Empty"/>
</Default>
</CallFailed>
214
Resource Files
You can add contacts one by one on the IP phone directly. You can also add multiple
contacts at a time and/or share contacts between IP phones using the local contact
template file. After setup, place the template file to the provisioning server, and specify
the access URL of the template file in the configuration files.
When editing a local contact file, learn the following:

<root_contact> indicates the start of a contact list and </root_contact> indicates
the end of a contact list.

<root_group> indicates the start of a group list and <root_group> indicates the
end of a group list.

When specifying a ring tone for the contact or the group, the format of the value
must be Auto, Resource:RingN.wav (for the default system ring tone) or
Custom:Name.wav (for the customized ring tone).

When specifying the desired line for the contact, the valid values are -1 and 0~5
(for SIP-T42G/T41P: 0~2). -1 stands for Auto, and 0~5 stand for line1~line6. Multiple
line IDs are separated by comma.

The parameter “default_photo” is not applicable to SIP-T42G and SIP-T41P IP
phones.
Procedure
Use the following procedures to customize a local contact template file.
To customize a local contact file:
1.
Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
2.
For each group that you want to add, add the following string to the file. Each starts
on a separate line:
<group display_name=”” ring=””/>
Where:
display_name=”” specifies the name of the group.
ring=”” specifies the desired ring tone for this group.
3.
For each contact that you want to add, add the following string to the file. Each
starts on a separate line:
<contact display_name="" office_number="" mobile_number="" other_number=""
line="" ring="" group_id_name="" default_photo="" />
215
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Where:
display_name=”” specifies the name of the contact (This value cannot be blank or
duplicated).
office_number =”” specifies the office number of the contact.
mobile_number=”” specifies the mobile number of the contact.
other_number=”” specifies the other number of the contact.
line=”” specifies the line you want to add this contact to.
ring=”” specifies the ring tone for this contact.
group_id_name=”” specifies the existing group you want to add the contact to.
default_photo=”” specifies the photo for this contact.
4.
Specify the values within double quotes.
5.
Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server.
The following is an example of a local contact file:
<root_group>
<group display_name=”Friend” ring=””/>
<group display_name=”Family” ring=”Resource:Ring1.wav”/>
</root_group>
<root_contact>
<contact display_name="John" office_number="1001"
mobile_number="12345678910" other_number="" line="0" ring="Auto"
group_id_name="All Contacts" default_photo=""/>
<contact display_name="Alice" office_number="1002" mobile_number=""
other_number="" line="2" ring=”Resource:Ring2.wav”
group_id_name="Friend" default_photo=""/>
</root_contact>
The IP phone can access 5 remote phone books. You can customize the remote XML
phone book for the IP phone as required. Before specifying the access URL of the
remote phone book in the configuration files, you need to create a remote XML phone
book and then place it to the provisioning server.
When creating an XML phone book, learn the following:

<YealinkIPPhoneDirectory> indicates the start of a phone book and
</YealinkIPPhoneDirectory> indicates the end of a phone book.

<DirectoryEntry> indicates the start of a contact and </DirectoryEntry> indicates
the end of a contact.
216
Resource Files
Procedure
Use the following procedures to customize an XML phone book.
To customize an XML phone book:
1.
Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
2.
For each contact that you want to add, add the following strings to the IP phone
book. Each starts on a separate line:
<Name>Mary</Name>
<Telephone>1001</Telephone>
Where:
Specify the contact name between <Name> and </Name>.
Specify the contact number between <Telephone> and </Telephone>.
3.
Specify the values within double quotes.
4.
Save the file and place this file to the provisioning server.
The following is an example of an XML phone book:
<YealinkIPPhoneDirectory>
<DirectoryEntry>
<Name>Jack</Name>
<Telephone>1003</Telephone>
</DirectoryEntry>
<DirectoryEntry>
<Name>John</Name>
<Telephone>1004</Telephone>
</DirectoryEntry>
<DirectoryEntry>
<Name>Marry</Name>
<Telephone>1005</Telephone>
</DirectoryEntry>
</YealinkIPPhoneDirectory>
Note
Yealink supplies a phone book generation tool to quickly generate a remote XML phone
book. For more information, refer to Yealink Phonebook Generation Tool User Guide.
217
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Access URL of the resource file can be configured in the configuration files:
Configure the access URL of the
replace rule template.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Access URL of Replace Rule
Template on page 351.
Configure the access URL of the
dial-now rule template.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Access URL of Dial-now
Template on page 352.
Configure the access URL of the
softkey layout template.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Access URL of Softkey Layout
Template on page 352.
Configure the access URL of the
local contact file.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Access URL of Local Contact
File on page 354.
Configure the access URL of the
remote XML phonebook.
Configuration File
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
For more information, refer to
Access URL of Remote XML
Phone Book on page 355.
218
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides an administrator with general information for troubleshooting
some common problems that he (or she) may encounter while using SIP-T4X IP phones.
IP phones can provide feedback in a variety of forms such as log files, packets, status
indicators and so on, which can help an administrator more easily find the system
problem and fix it.
The following are helpful for better understanding and resolving the working status of
the IP phone.

Viewing Log Files

Capturing Packets

Enabling the Watch Dog Feature

Getting Information from Status Indicators

Analyzing Configuration Files
The IP phone can log various events to log files. So if your IP phone encounters some
problems, commonly the log files are used. You can export the log files to a syslog
server or the local system. You can also set the system log level to specify the severity
level of the log to be reported to a log file. The default system log level is 3.
In the configuration files, you can use the following parameters to configure system log
settings:

syslog.server -- Specify the IP address of the syslog server to which the log will be
exported.

syslog.log_level -- Specify the system log level (Changes to this parameter via web
user interface require a reboot).
For more information on the system log setting configuration parameters, refer to Log
Settings on page 356.
To configure the system log level via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Configuration.
219
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
Select the desired level from the pull-down list of System Log Level.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt “Do you want to restart your machine?”.
4.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
The configuration will take effect after reboot.
Note
Administrator level debugging may make some sensitive information become accessible
(e.g., password-dial number). We recommend that you reset the system log level to 3
after having provided the system log file.
To configure the phone to export the system log to a syslog server via web user
interface:
220
1.
Click on Settings->Configuration.
2.
Mark the Server radio box in the Export System Log field.
3.
Enter the IP address or domain name of the syslog server in the Server Name field.
Troubleshooting
4.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
A dialog box pops up to prompt “Do you want to restart your machine?”.
5.
Click OK to reboot the IP phone.
The system log will be exported to the desired syslog server after reboot.
To export a log file to the local system via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Configuration.
2.
Mark the Local radio box In the Export System Log field.
3.
Click Export to open file download window, and then save the file to your local
system.
4.
Reproduce the issue.
The following figure shows a portion of a log file:
221
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
You can capture packets in two ways: capturing the packets via web user interface or
using the Ethernet software. You can analyze the packets captured for troubleshooting
purpose.
To capture packet via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Upgrade.
2.
Click Start to start capturing signal traffic.
3.
Reproduce the issue to get stack traces.
4.
Click Stop to end capturing.
5.
Click Export to open the file download window, and then save the file to your local
system.
To capture packet using the Ethernet software:
Connect the Internet port of the IP phone and the PC to the same HUB, and then use
Sniffer, Ethereal or Wireshark software to capture the signal traffic.
IP phones support a troubleshooting feature called Watch Dog, which helps you monitor
IP phones status and provides the ability to get stack traces from the last time the IP
phone failed. When watch dog is enabled, IP phones will automatically reboot when it
detects a fatal failure. This feature can be configured using the configuration files or the
web user interface.
You can use the “watch_dog.enable” parameter to configure watch dog in the
configuration files. For more information, refer to Watch Dog on page 357.
222
Troubleshooting
To configure watch dog via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Preference.
2.
Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Watch Dog.
3.
Click Confirm to accept the change.
Status indicators may consist of the power LED, line key indicator, headset key indicator
mute key indicator and the on-screen icon or error messages.
The following shows two examples of getting the phone information from status
indicators on SIP-T46G IP phone:

If a LINK failure of the IP phone is detected, a prompting message “Network
Unavailable” and the icon

appear on the LCD screen.
If an active call on the IP phone is on mute, the Mute key LED illuminates.
For more information on the icons, refer to Reading Icons on page 15.
Wrong configurations may have an impact on your phone use. You can export
configuration file to check the current configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot if
necessary.
To export configuration file via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Configuration.
223
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
2.
In the Export or Import Configuration block, click Export to open the file download
window, and then save the file to your local system.
This section describes solutions to common issues that may occur while using the IP
phone. Upon encountering a scenario not listed in this section, contact your Yealink
reseller for further support.
Do one of the following:

Ensure that the IP phone is properly plugged into a functional AC outlet.

Ensure that the IP phone is plugged into a socket controlled by a switch that is on.

If the IP phone is plugged into a power strip, try plugging it directly into a wall
outlet.

If your phone is PoE powered, ensure you are using a PoE-compliant switch or hub.
’
Do one of the following:

Ensure that the Ethernet cable is plugged into the Internet port on the IP phone and
the Ethernet cable is not loose.
224

Ensure that the Ethernet cable is not damaged.

Ensure that the IP address and related network parameters are set correctly.

Ensure that your network switch or hub is operational.
Troubleshooting
Press the OK key when the IP phone is idle to check the basic information (e.g., IP
address MAC address and firmware version).
’
Do one of the following:

Ensure that the target firmware is not the same as the current firmware.

Ensure that the target firmware is applicable to the IP phone model.

Ensure that the current or the target firmware is not protected.

Ensure that the power is on and the network is available in the process of
upgrading.

Ensure that the web browser is not closed and refreshed when upgrading firmware
using the web user interface.
’
Check if the IP phone is configured to obtain the time and date from the NTP server
automatically. If your phone is unable to access the NTP server, configure the time and
date manually.
If you have poor sound quality/acoustics like intermittent voice, low volume, echo or
other noise, the possible reasons could be:

Users are seated too far out of recommended microphone range and sound faint,
or are seated too close to sensitive microphones and cause echo.

Intermittent voice is mainly caused by packet loss, due to network congestion, and
jitter, due to message recombination of transmission or receiving equipment (i.e.
timeout handling, retransmission mechanism, buffer under run).

Noisy equipment, such as a computer or a fan, may cause voice interference. Turn
off any noisy equipment.

Line issues can also cause this problem; disconnect the old line and redial the call
to ensure another line may provide better connection.
225
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
A remote phone book is placed on a server, while a local phonebook is placed on the IP
phone flash. A remote phone book can be used by everyone that can access the server,
while a local phonebook can only be used by a specific phone. A remote phone book is
always used as a central phonebook for a company; each employee can load it to
obtain the real-time data from the same server.
Both user name and register name are defined by the server. User name identifies the
account, while register name matched with a password is for authentication purposes.
Display name is the caller ID that will be displayed on the callee’s phone LCD screen.
Server configurations may override the local ones.
IP phones support remote reboot by a SIP NOTIFY message with “Event: check-sync”
header. The parameter “reboot=true” makes the IP phone reboot immediately after
receiving the NOTIFY message. The message is formed as below:
NOTIFY sip:<user>@<dsthost> SIP/2.0
To: sip:<user>@<dsthost>
From: sip:sipsak@<srchost>
CSeq: 10 NOTIFY
Call-ID: 1234@<srchost>
Event: check-sync;reboot=true
You can press the volume key to increase or decrease the ringer volume and receiver
volume. Press the volume key to adjust the ringer volume when the phone is idle, or to
tune the volume of the engaged audio device (handset, speakerphone or headset)
when there is an active call in progress.
226
Troubleshooting
IP phones use the PoE preferentially.
Auto provisioning refers to the update of IP phones, including update on the
configuration parameters, local phonebook, firmware and so on. You can use auto
provisioning on a single phone, but it makes more sense in mass deployment.
Plug and Play (PnP) is a method for IP phones to acquire the provisioning server address.
With PnP enabled, the IP phone broadcasts the PNP SUBSCRIBE message to obtain a
provisioning server address during startup. Any SIP server recognizing the message will
respond with the preconfigured provisioning server address, so the IP phone will be
able to download the configuration files from the provisioning server. PnP depends on
support from a SIP server.
’
Do one of the following:

Ensure that the configuration is set correctly.

Reboot the IP phone. Some configurations require a reboot to take effect.

Ensure that the configuration is applicable to the IP phone model.

The configuration may depend on support from the server.
“
”
“
”
They are codes that the IP phone sends to the server when a certain action takes place.
On code is used to activate a feature on the server side, while off code is used to
deactivate a feature on the server side.
For example, if you set the Always Forward on code to be *78 (may vary on different
servers), and the target number to be 201. When you enable Always Forward on the IP
phone, the IP phone sends *78201 to the server, and then the server will enable the
Always Forward feature on the server side, hence being able to get the right status of
the extension.
227
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Do one of the following:

Reset another available IP address for the IP phone.

Check network configuration via phone user interface at the path
Menu->Advanced->Network->WAN Port->IPv4 (or IPv6). If the Static IP is selected,
select DHCP instead.
Reset your phone to factory configurations after you have tried all troubleshooting
suggestions but do not resolve the problem. Note that all customized settings will be
overwritten after resetting.
To reset your phone via web user interface:
1.
Click on Settings->Upgrade.
2.
Click Reset in the Reset to Factory Setting field.
The web user interface prompts the message “Do you want to reset to factory?”.
3.
Click OK to confirm the resetting.
The phone will be reset to factory sucessfully after startup.
Note
Reset of the phone may take a few minutes. Do not power off until the phone starts up
successfully.
Factory reset can restore the original password, by pressing the OK key when the IP
phone is idle. All customized settings will be overwritten after reset.
228
Appendix
802.1x — an IEEE Standard for port-based Network Access Control (PNAC). It is part of
the IEEE 802.1 group of networking protocols. It offers an authentication mechanism for
devices to connect to a LAN or WLAN.
ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) — used to distribute calls from large volumes of
incoming calls to the registered IP phone users.
ACS (Auto Configuration server) — responsible for auto-configuration of the Central
Processing Element (CPE).
Cryptographic Key — a piece of variable data that is fed as input into a cryptographic
algorithm to perform operations such as encryption and decryption, or signing and
verification.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) — built on a client-server model, where
designated DHCP server hosts allocate network addresses and deliver configuration
parameters to dynamically configured hosts.
DHCP Option — can be configured for specific values and enabled for assignment and
distribution to DHCP clients based on server, scope, class or client-specific levels.
DNS (Domain Name System) — a hierarchical distributed naming system for computers,
services, or any resource connected to the Internet or a private network.
EAP-MD5 (Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5) — only
provides authentication of the EAP peer to the EAP server but not mutual authentication.
EAP-TLS (Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security) — Provides for
mutual authentication, integrity-protected cipher suite negotiation between two
endpoints.
PEAP-MSCHAPV2 (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol-Microsoft Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol Version 2) — Provides for mutual authentication, but
does not require a client certificate on the IP phone.
FAC (Feature Access Code) — special patterns of characters that are dialed from a
phone keypad to invoke particular features.
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) — used to request and transmit data on the World
Wide Web.
HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer) — a widely-used
communications protocol for secure communication over a network.
229
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) — a non-profit professional
association headquartered in New York City that is dedicated to advancing
technological innovation and excellence.
LAN (Local Area Network) — used to interconnects network devices in a limited area
such as a home, school, computer laboratory, or office building.
MIB (Management Information Base) — a virtual database used for managing the
entities in a communications network.
OID (Object Identifier) — assigned to an individual object within a MIB.
PNP (Plug and Play) — a term used to describe the characteristic of a computer bus, or
device specification, which facilitates the discovery of a hardware component in a
system, without the need for physical device configuration, or user intervention in
resolving resource conflicts.
ROM (Read-only Memory) — a class of storage medium used in computers and other
electronic devices.
RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) — provides end-to-end service for real-time data.
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) — a transport layer protocol used by applications
that require guaranteed delivery.
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) — a protocol offers non-guaranteed datagram delivery.
URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) — a compact sequence of characters that identifies
an abstract or physical resource.
URL (Uniform Resource Locator) — specifies the address of an Internet resource.
VLAN (Virtual LAN) -- a group of hosts with a common set of requirements, which
communicate as if they were attached to the same broadcast domain, regardless of
their physical location.
VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) — a family of technologies used for the delivery of
voice communications and multimedia sessions over IP networks.
WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) — a type of local area network that uses
high-frequency radio waves rather than wires to communicate between nodes.
XML-RPC (Remote Procedure Call Protocol) — which uses XML to encode its calls and
HTTP as a transport mechanism.
230
Appendix
Time Zone
Time Zone Name
−11:00
Samoa
−10:00
United States-Hawaii-Aleutian
−10:00
United States-Alaska-Aleutian
−09:00
United States-Alaska Time
−08:00
Canada(Vancouver, Whitehorse)
−08:00
Mexico(Tijuana, Mexicali)
−08:00
United States-Pacific Time
−07:00
Canada(Edmonton, Calgary)
−07:00
Mexico(Mazatlan, Chihuahua)
−07:00
United States-Mountain Time
−07:00
United States-MST no DST
−06:00
Canada-Manitoba(Winnipeg)
−06:00
Chile(Easter Islands)
−06:00
Mexico(Mexico City, Acapulco)
−06:00
United States-Central Time
−05:00
Bahamas(Nassau)
−05:00
Canada(Montreal, Ottawa, Quebec)
−05:00
Cuba(Havana)
−05:00
United States-Eastern Time
−04:30
Venezuela(Caracas)
−04:00
Canada(Halifax, Saint John)
−04:00
Chile(Santiago)
−04:00
Paraguay(Asuncion)
−04:00
United Kingdom-Bermuda(Bermuda)
−04:00
United Kingdom(Falkland Islands)
−04:00
Trinidad&Tobago
−03:30
Canada-New Foundland(St.Johns)
−03:00
Denmark-Greenland(Nuuk)
−03:00
Argentina(Buenos Aires)
−03:00
Brazil(no DST)
−03:00
Brazil(DST)
−02:00
Brazil(no DST)
−01:00
Portugal(Azores)
0
GMT
0
Greenland
0
Denmark-Faroe Islands(Torshavn)
0
Ireland(Dublin)
0
Portugal(Lisboa, Porto, Funchal)
0
Spain-Canary Islands(Las Palmas)
231
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Time Zone
232
Time Zone Name
0
United Kingdom(London)
0
Morocco
+01:00
Albania(Tirane)
+01:00
Austria(Vienna)
+01:00
Belgium(Brussels)
+01:00
Caicos
+01:00
Chad
+01:00
Croatia(Zagreb)
+01:00
Czech Republic(Prague)
+01:00
Denmark(Kopenhagen)
+01:00
France(Paris)
+01:00
Germany(Berlin)
+01:00
Hungary(Budapest)
+01:00
Italy(Rome)
+01:00
Luxembourg(Luxembourg)
+01:00
Macedonia(Skopje)
+01:00
Netherlands(Amsterdam)
+01:00
Namibia(Windhoek)
+02:00
Estonia(Tallinn)
+02:00
Finland(Helsinki)
+02:00
Gaza Strip(Gaza)
+02:00
Greece(Athens)
+02:00
Israel(Tel Aviv)
+02:00
Jordan(Amman)
+02:00
Latvia(Riga)
+02:00
Lebanon(Beirut)
+02:00
Moldova(Kishinev)
+02:00
Russia(Kaliningrad)
+02:00
Romania(Bucharest)
+02:00
Syria(Damascus)
+02:00
Turkey(Ankara)
+02:00
Ukraine(Kyiv, Odessa)
+03:00
East Africa Time
+03:00
Iraq(Baghdad)
+03:00
Russia(Moscow)
+03:30
Iran(Teheran)
+04:00
Armenia(Yerevan)
+04:00
Azerbaijan(Baku)
+04:00
Georgia(Tbilisi)
+04:00
Kazakhstan(Aktau)
+04:00
Russia(Samara)
+04:30
Afghanistan
Appendix
Time Zone
Time Zone Name
+05:00
Kazakhstan(Aqtobe)
+05:00
Kyrgyzstan(Bishkek)
+05:00
Pakistan(Islamabad)
+05:00
Russia(Chelyabinsk)
+05:30
India(Calcutta)
+06:00
Kazakhstan(Astana, Almaty)
+06:00
Russia(Novosibirsk, Omsk)
+07:00
Russia(Krasnoyarsk)
+07:00
Thailand(Bangkok)
+08:00
China(Beijing)
+08:00
Singapore(Singapore)
+08:00
Australia(Perth)
+09:00
Korea(Seoul)
+09:00
Japan(Tokyo)
+09:30
Australia(Adelaide)
+09:30
Australia(Darwin)
+10:00
Australia(Sydney, Melbourne, Canberra)
+10:00
Australia(Brisbane)
+10:00
Australia(Hobart)
+10:00
Russia(Vladivostok)
+10:30
Australia(Lord Howe Islands)
+11:00
New Caledonia(Noumea)
+12:00
New Zealand(Wellington, Auckland)
+12:45
New Zealand(Chatham Islands)
+13:00
Tonga(Nukualofa)
233
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
This appendix describes configuration parameters in the configuration files for each
feature. The configuration files are <y0000000000xx>.cfg and <MAC>.cfg.
You can set parameters in the configuration files to configure IP phones. The
<y0000000000xx>.cfg and <MAC>.cfg files are stored on the provisioning server. The
IP phone checks for configuration files and looks for resource files when restarting the IP
phone. The <y0000000000xx>.cfg file stores configurations for all phones of the same
model. The <MAC>.cfg file stores configurations for a specific IP phone with that MAC
address.
Configuration changes made in the <MAC>.cfg file override the configuration settings
in the <y0000000000xx>.cfg file.
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.internet_port.type
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the Internet port type.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-DHCP
1-PPPoE
2-Static IP Address
Example
234
network.internet_port.type= 0
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.internet_port.type
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the Internet port type.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-DHCP
1-PPPoE
2-Static IP Address
Example
network.internet_port.type = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ip_address_mode
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the IP addressing mode.
IP phones support to use the IPv4 address only,
the IPv6 address only or both IPv4 and IPv6
Description
addresses.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-IPv4
1-IPv6
2-IPv4&IPv6
Example
network.ip_address_mode = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.internet_port.ip
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Configures the IP address when the Internet
235
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
port type is configured as Static IP Address.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.internet_port.ip = 192.168.1.20
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.internet_port.mask
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the subnet mask when the Internet
port type is configured as Static IP Address.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.internet_port.mask = 255.255.255.0
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.internet_port.gateway
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the default gateway when the
Internet port type is configured as Static IP
Description
Address.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
236
network.internet_port.gateway =
192.168.1.254
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.primary_dns
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the primary DNS server when the
Internet port type is configured as Static IP
Description
Address.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.primary_dns = 202.101.103.5
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.secondary_dns
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the secondary DNS server when
the Internet port type is configured as Static IP
Description
Address.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.secondary_dns = 202.101.103.6
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.internet_port.type
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the Internet port type.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
237
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Valid values are:
Range
0-DHCP
1-PPPoE
2-Static IP Address
Example
network.internet_port.type= 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.pppoe.user
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the PPPoE user name when the
Internet port type is configured as PPPoE.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.pppoe.user = xmyealink
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.pppoe.password
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the PPPoE password when the
Internet port type is configured as PPPoE.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
238
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.pppoe.password = yealink123
Appendix
Internet Port Negotiation
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.internet_port.speed_d
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
uplex
Specifies the transmission method of Internet
Description
port.
Note: We recommend that you do not change
this parameter.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
0-Auto negotiate
1-Full duplex, 10Mbps
Range
2-Full duplex, 100Mbps
3-Half duplex, 10Mbps
4-Half duplex, 100Mbps
5-Full duplex, 1000Mbps (not applicable to
SIP-T41P)
Example
network.internet_port.speed_duplex = 0
PC Port Transmission Method
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.pc_port.speed_duplex
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the transmission method of PC port.
Description
Note: We recommend that you do not change
this parameter.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
0-Auto negotiate
1-Full duplex, 10Mbps
Range
2-Full duplex, 100Mbps
3-Half duplex, 10Mbps
4-Half duplex, 100Mbps
5-Full duplex, 1000Mbps (not applicable to
SIP-T41P)
239
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Example
network.pc_port.speed_duplex = 0
Replace Rule
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.replace.prefix.x
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the string you want to replace.
X ranges from 1 to 100.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dialplan.replace.prefix.1 = 91([5-7])12
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.replace.replace.x
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the alternate string instead of what
Description
the user enters.
X ranges from 1 to 100.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dialplan.replace.replace.1 = 91$12
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.replace.line_id.x
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the desired line to apply this replace
rule.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 100.
Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by
comma.
240
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Valid values are:
Appendix
0 to 6 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 3 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Example
dialplan.replace.line_id.1 = 1,2
Dial-now
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.dialnow.rule.x
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the string used to match the numbers
entered by the user. When entered numbers
Description
match the predefined dial-now rule, the IP
phone will automatically dial out the numbers
without pressing the send key.
X ranges from 1 to 100.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dialplan.dialnow.rule.1 = 2216
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.dialnow.line_id.x
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the desired line to apply this
dial-now rule.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 100.
Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by
comma.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Valid values are:
Range
0 to 6 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 3 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Example
dialplan.dialnow.line_id.1 = 1,2,3
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.dialnow_delay
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the delay time (in seconds) for the
dial-now rule.
241
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
When entered numbers match the predefined
dial-now rule, the IP phone will automatically
dial out the entered number after the specified
delay time.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Range
1 to 14
Example
phone_setting.dialnow_delay = 1
Area Code
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.area_code.code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Defines the area code to add before the
entered numbers.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dialplan.area_code.code = 010
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.area_code.min_len
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the minimum length of the entered
numbers.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Range
1 to 15
Example
dialplan.area_code.min_len = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.area_code.max_len
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the maximum length of the entered
Description
numbers.
Note: The value must be larger than the
minimum length.
Format
242
Integer
Appendix
Default Value
15
Range
1 to 15
Example
dialplan.area_code.max_len = 13
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.area_code.line_id
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the desired line to apply this area
Description
code rule.
Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by
comma.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Blank (for all lines)
Valid values are:
Range
0 to 6 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 3 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Example
dialplan.area_code.line_id = 1,2
Block Out
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.block_out.number.x
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the block out numbers.
X ranges from 1 to 10.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dialplan.block_out.number.1 = 1000
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan.block_out.line_id.x
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the desired line to apply this block
out rule.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 10.
Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by
comma.
243
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Format
Integer
Default Value
Blank (for all lines)
Valid values are:
Range
0 to 6 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 3 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Example
dialplan.block_out.line_id.1 = 1,2,3
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.active_backlight
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
_level
Configures the backlight level used to adjust
the backlight intensity of the LCD screen.
Description
Level 10 is the brightest.
Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T42G and
SIP-T41P IP phones.
Format
Integer
Default Value
8
Range
1 to 10
Example
phone_setting.active_backlight_level = 9
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.inactive_backlig
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
ht_level
Configures whether the IP phone to turn off or
turn dusky the backlight of the LCD screen
Description
after a period of inactivity.
Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T42G and
SIP-T41P IP phones.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
Example
244
0-Off
1-Low
phone_setting.inactive_backlight_level = 1
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.backlight_time
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the backlight time (in minutes)
used to specify the delay time to turn off the
Description
backlight when the IP phone is inactive.
If it is set to 5 (for SIP-T42G), the LCD backlight
is turned off when the IP phone is inactive for 5
minutes.
Format
Default Value
Integer
1 (for SIP-T46G)
0 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Valid values are:
For T46G:
1- Always on
60-1min
120-2min
300-5min
600-10min
Range
1800-30min
For T42G/T41P:
0-Always on
1-1min
2-2min
5-5min
10-10min
30-30min
Example
phone_setting.backlight_time = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
security.user_password
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a new user password for the IP
phone.
The IP phone uses “user” as the default user
Description
password.
A valid password should contain at least 6
characters, where at least one numeric and
one alphabetic characters.
245
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Note: IP phones support ASCII characters
32-126(0x20-0x7E) only in passwords.
Format
user name:new password
Default Value
user
Range
ASCII characters 32-126(0x20-0x7E)
Example
security.user_password = user:password123
Parameter-
Configuration File
security.user_password
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a new administrator password for
the IP phone.
The IP phone uses “admin” as the default
administrator password.
Description
A valid password should contain at least 6
characters, where at least one numeric and
one alphabetic characters.
Note: IP phones support ASCII characters
32-126(0x20-0x7E) only in passwords.
Format
administrator name:new password
Default Value
admin
Range
ASCII characters 32-126(0x20-0x7E)
Example
security.user_password = admin:password000
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.lock
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables phone lock feature.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
246
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
phone_setting.lock = 1
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_k
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
ey_type
Specifies the type of phone lock.
Menu Key: The Menu soft key is locked.
Function Keys: MESSAGE, Redial, HOLD,
Description
MUTE, TRAN, OK, X, navigation keys, soft keys
and line keys are locked.
All Keys: All keys are locked, except the
Volume, Headset, Speakerphone and digit
keys.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-All Keys
1-Function Keys
2-Menu Key
Example
phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_key_type = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.phone_lock.unlo
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
ck_pin
Configures a new unlock password.
Description
Once the IP phone is locked, you can use the
default password “123” to unlock it.
Format
Numeric characters only
Default Value
123
Range
0 to 15 characters
Example
phone_setting.phone_lock.unlock_pin =
123456
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.phone_lock.lock
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
_time_out
Description
Configures the IP phone to automatically lock
the keypad after a delay time (in seconds).
247
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
If it is set to 0, the keypad will not be locked
automatically. In this case, you can long press
the pound key to lock the keypad.
Note: This parameter works only if the IP
phone lock type is preset.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 to 3600
Example
phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_time_out = 8
NTP Server
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.ntp_server1
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the IP address or the domain name
of the primary NTP server.
Format
IP Address or Domain Name
Default Value
cn.pool.ntp.org
Range
Not Applicable
Example
local_time.ntp_server1 = 192.168.0.5
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.ntp_server2
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the IP address or the domain name
of the secondary NTP server. If the primary NTP
Description
server is not configured or cannot be
accessed, the IP phone will request the time
and date from the secondary NTP server.
248
Format
IP Address or Domain Name
Default Value
cn.pool.ntp.org
Range
Not Applicable
Example
local_time.ntp_server2 = 192.168.0.6
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.interval
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the IP phone to update time and
Description
date from the NTP server at regular intervals
(in seconds).
Format
Integer
Default Value
1000
Range
15 to 86400
Example
local_time.interval = 1200
Time Zone
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.time_zone
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the time zone.
Description
For more available time zone list, refer to
Appendix B: Time Zones on page 231.
Format
Not Applicable
Default Value
+8
Range
-11 to +13
Example
local_time.time_zone = +9
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.time_zone_name
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the time zone name.
Description
For more available time zone name list, refer
to Appendix B: Time Zones on page 231.
Format
String
Default Value
China(Beijing)
Range
Not Applicable
Example
local_time.time_zone_name = Korea(Seoul)
DST
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.summer_time
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
249
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Description
Enables or disables the use of Daylight Saving
Time (DST).
Format
Integer
Default Value
2
Valid values are:
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
2-Automatic
Example
local_time.summer_time = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.dst_time_type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the DST type.
Description
Note: It works only if the parameter
“local_time.summer_time” is set to 1
(Enabled).
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-By Date
1-By Week
Example
local_time.dst_time_type = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.start_time
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the time to start DST.
If “local_time.dst_time_type” is set to 0 (By
Date), use the mapping:
MM: 1=Jan, 2=Feb,…, 12=Dec
DD:1=the first day in a month,…, 31= the last
Description
day in a month
HH:0=1am, 1=2am,…, 23=12pm
If “local_time.dst_time_type” is set to 1 (By
Week), use the mapping:
Month: 1=Jan, 2=Feb,…, 12=Dec
Week of Month: 1=the first week in a month,…,
5=the last week in a month
250
Appendix
Day of Week: 1=Mon, 2=Tues,…, 7=Sun
Hour of Day: 0=1am, 1=2am,…, 23=12pm
Note: It works only if the parameter
“local_time.summer_time” is set to 1
(Enabled).
The value formats are:
Format

MM/DD/HH (For By Date)

Month/Week of Month/Day of Week/Hour
of Day (For By Week)
Default Value
Range
1/1/0
1to 12/1 to 31/0 to 23 (for By Date)
1 to 12/1 to 5/1 to 7/0 to 23 (for By Week)
Example
local_time.start_time = 5/20/12
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.end_time
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the time to end DST.
If “local_time.dst_time_type” is set to 0 (By
Date), use the mapping:
MM: 1=Jan, 2=Feb,…, 12=Dec
DD:1=the first day in a month,…, 31= the last
day in a month
HH:0=1am, 1=2am,…, 23=12pm
If “local_time.dst_time_type” is set to 1 (By
Description
Week), use the mapping:
Month: 1=Jan, 2=Feb,…, 12=Dec
Week of Month: 1=the first week in a month,…,
5=the last week in a month
Day of Week: 1=Mon, 2=Tues,…, 7=Sun
Hour of Day: 0=1am, 1=2am,…, 23=12pm
Note: It works only if the parameter
“local_time.summer_time” is set to 1
(Enabled).
The value formats are:
Format

MM/DD/HH (For By Date)

Month/Week of Month/Day of Week/Hour
of Day (For By Week)
251
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Default Value
Range
12/31/23
1to 12/1 to 31/0 to 23 (for By Date)
1 to 12/1 to 5/1 to 7/0 to 23 (for By Week)
Example
local_time.end_time = 10/25/22
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.offset_time
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the offset time (in minutes) of DST.
Description
Note: It works only when the parameter
“local_time.summer_time” is set to 1
(Enabled).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Blank
Range
-300 to +300
Example
local_time.offset_time = 120
Time Format
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.time_format
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the time format.
If it is set to 0 (12 Hour), the time display uses
Description
12 hour format.
If it is set to 1 (24 Hour), the time display uses
24 hour format.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Range
Example
0-12 Hour
1-24 Hour
local_time.time_format = 0
Date Format
252
Parameter-
Configuration File
local_time.date_format
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the date format.
Format
Integer
Appendix
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
0-WWW MMM DD
1-DD-MMM-YY
Range
2-YYYY-MM-DD
3-DD/MM/YYYY
4-MM/DD/YY
5-DD MMM YYYY
6-WWW DD MMM
Example
local_time.date_format = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
gui_lang.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the language
pack.
Note: The language packs you load are
Description
dependent on available language packs from
the provisioning server. You can download the
language pack to the phone user interface
only.
Format
URL
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
The following example uses HTTP to
download a new Italian language pack
“10.GUI.Italian.lang”for T46G IP phone or
“lang-Italian.txt” for T42G/T41P IP phone
from the provisioning server 192.168.10.25.
Example
For SIP-T46G IP phone:
gui_lang.url =
http://192.168.10.25/10.GUI.Italian.lang
For SIP-T42G/T41P IP phone:
gui_lang.url =
http://192.168.10.25/lang-Italian.txt
253
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
lang.gui
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the language used on the phone
user interface.
Format
String
Default Value
English
Valid values are:
English
Chinese_S (not applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)
Chinese_T (not applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)
French
Range
Deutsch
Italian
Polish
Portuguese
Spanish
Turkish
Dutch (not applicable to SIP-T46G/T42G)
Example
lang.gui = English
Parameter-
Configuration File
lang.wui
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the language used on the web user
interface.
Note: The default language used on the web
Description
user interface depends on the language
preferences of your browser. If the language
of your browser is not supported by the IP
phone, the web user interface will use English
by default.
Format
String
Default Value
Not Applicable
Valid values are:
English
Range
Chinese_S (not applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)
Chinese_T (not applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)
French
German
254
Appendix
Italian
Portuguese
Spanish
Turkish
Example
lang.wui = French
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.lcd_logo.mode
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the logo mode of the LCD screen.
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone is not
allowed to display a logo.
If it is set to 1 (System logo), the LCD screen
Description
will display the system logo.
If it is set to 2 (Custom logo), the LCD screen
will display the custom logo (you need to
upload a custom logo file to the phone).
Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T41P IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Valid values are:
Range
0-Disabled
1-System logo
2-Custom logo
Example
phone_setting.lcd_logo.mode = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
lcd_logo.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the access URL of custom logo file.
Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T41P IP phone.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
The following example uses HTTP to download
the custom logo file (logo.dob) from the
255
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
provisioning server 192.168.10.25.
lcd_logo.url = http://192.168.10.25/logo.dob
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.pound_key.mode
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Defines the "#" or "*" key as the send key.
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), neither “#” nor “*”
can be used as a send key.
Description
If it is set to 1 (# key), the pound key is used as
the send key.
If it is set to 2 (* key), the asterisk key is used as
the send key.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Valid values are:
Range
0-Disabled
1-# key
2-* key
Example
features.pound_key.mode = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.send_key_tone
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to play a
tone when a user presses a send key.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone plays a
Description
tone when a user presses a send key.
Note: It works only if the key tone is enabled.
So you should set the parameter
“features.key_tone” to 1 (Enabled) in
advance.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Range
Example
256
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
features.send_key_tone = 0
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.hotline_number
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the hotline number.
It specifies a number that the IP phone
Description
automatically dials out when lifting the
handset, pressing the speakerphone key or
the line key. Leaving it blank disables hotline
feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
features.hotline_number = 3601
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.hotline_delay
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the waiting time (in seconds) the IP
phone automatically dials out the hotline
number.
If it is set to 0 (0s), the IP phone immediately
dials out the preconfigured hotline number
Description
when you lift the handset, press the
speakerphone key or press the line key.
If it is set to a value greater than 0, the IP
phone waits the specified seconds before
dialing out the predefined hotline number
when you lift the handset, press the
speakerphone key or the line key.
Format
Integer
Default Value
4
Range
0 to 10
Example
features.hotline_delay = 5
257
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.history_save_display
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to display the
Save Call Log option on the web user
interface.
Description
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the Save Call Log
option is hidden on the web user interface.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you can enable or
disable call log feature via web user interface.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.history_save_display = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.history_save_display
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to display the
Save Call Log option on the web user
interface.
Description
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the Save Call Log
option is hidden on the web user interface.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you can enable or
disable call log feature via web user interface.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
258
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.history_save_display = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.missed_calllog
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables missed call log feature for
Appendix
account X.
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), there is no indicator
displaying on the LCD screen, the IP phone
does not log the missed call in the Missed
Calls list.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), a prompt message
"<number> New Missed Call(s)" along with
an indicator icon is displayed on the IP phone
idle screen when the IP phone misses calls.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.missed_calllog = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.predial_autodial
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables live dialpad feature.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone
automatically dials out the entered phone
number without having to press any key.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
phone_setting.predial_autodial = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.inter_digit_time
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the time (in seconds) for the phone to
Description
automatically dial out the entered digits without
pressing any other key.
Note: It works only if the parameter
259
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
“phone_setting.predial_autodial” is set to 1
(Enabled).
Format
Integer
Default Value
4
Range
1 to 14
Example
phone_setting.inter_digit_time = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
call_waiting.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables call waiting feature.
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), a new incoming call
is automatically rejected by the IP phone with
Description
a busy message while during a call.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the LCD screen
presents a new incoming call while during a
call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
1-Enabled
Example
call_waiting.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
call_waiting.on_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
260
0-Disabled
Configures the call waiting on code to activate
the server-side call waiting feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
call_waiting.on_code = *55
Parameter-
Configuration File
call_waiting.off_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Appendix
Description
Configures the call waiting off code to
deactivate the server-side call waiting feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
call_waiting.on_code = *56
Parameter-
Configuration File
call_waiting.tone
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the playing of a call
waiting tone when the IP phone receives an
incoming call during a call.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone performs
an audible indicator when receiving a new
incoming call during a call.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“call_waiting.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
call_waiting.tone = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_redial.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to
automatically redial the called number when it
Description
is busy.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone dials the
previous dialed out number automatically
when the dialed number is busy.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
261
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
1-Enabled
Example
auto_redial.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_redial.interval
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP
phone to wait between redials.
Description
The IP phone redials the dialed number at
regular intervals till the callee answers the
call.
Format
Integer
Default Value
10
Range
1 to 300
Example
auto_redial.interval = 30
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_redial.times
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the redial times for the IP phone.
Description
The IP phone tries to redial the dialed number
as many times as configured till the callee
answers the call.
Format
Integer
Default Value
10
Range
1 to 300
Example
auto_redial.times = 8
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.auto_answer
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables auto answer feature for
account X.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone can
automatically answer an incoming call.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
262
Appendix
Note: The IP phone cannot automatically
answer the incoming call during a call even if
auto answer is enabled.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
account.1.auto_answer = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.auto_answer_delay
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the delay time (in seconds) of auto
answer.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3
Range
1 to 4
Example
features.auto_answer_delay = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.call_completion_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables call completion feature.
If a user places a call and the callee is
temporarily not available to answer the call,
call completion feature allows notifying the
Description
user when the callee becomes available to
receive a call.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the caller is notified
when the callee becomes available to
receive a call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
263
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Example
features.call_completion_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.anonymous_call
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables anonymous call feature for
account X.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone blocks its
Description
identity from showing up to the callee when
placing a call. The callee’s phone LCD screen
presents anonymous instead of the caller’s
identity.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.anonymous_call = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.anonymous_call_onc
<MAC>.cfg
ode
Configures the anonymous call on code to
Description
activate the server-side anonymous call
feature for account X (optional).
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.anonymous_call_oncode = *72
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.anonymous_call_offc
<MAC>.cfg
ode
264
Appendix
Configures the anonymous call off code to
Description
deactivate the server-side anonymous call
feature for account X (optional).
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.anonymous_call_offcode = *73
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.reject_anonymous_c
<MAC>.cfg
all
Enables or disables anonymous call rejection
feature for account X.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone
Description
automatically rejects incoming calls from
anonymity. The anonymous user’s LCD screen
presents “Anonymity Disallowed”.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.reject_anonymous_call = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.anonymous_reject_o
<MAC>.cfg
ncode
Configures the anonymous call rejection on
Description
code to activate the server-side anonymous
call rejection feature for account X (optional).
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
265
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.anonymous_reject_oncode = *74
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.anonymous_reject_of
<MAC>.cfg
fcode
Configures the anonymous call rejection off
Description
code to deactivate the server-side anonymous
call rejection feature for account X (optional).
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.anonymous_reject_offcode = *73
Return Message When DND
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dnd_refuse_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Defines return codes and reason of the SIP
response message when rejecting an
incoming call for DND. A specific reason is
Description
displayed on the caller’s LCD screen.
If it is set to 486 (Busy here), the caller’s LCD
screen displays the reason “Busy here” when
the callee enables DND.
Format
Integer
Default Value
480
Valid values are:
Range
404-No Found
480-Temporarily Not Available
486-Busy Here
Example
266
features.dnd_refuse_code = 486
Appendix
DND Mode
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dnd_mode
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the DND mode for the IP phone.
If it is set to 0 (Phone), the DND feature is
Description
effective for the IP phone.
If it is set to 1 (Custom), you can configure DND
feature for each account.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Phone
1-Custom
features.dnd_mode = 0
DND in Phone Mode
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dnd.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables DND feature.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone rejects
incoming calls on all accounts.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.dnd.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dnd.on_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the DND on code to activate the
server-side DND feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
features.dnd.on_code = *71
267
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dnd.on_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the DND on code to activate the
server-side DND feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
features.dnd.on_code = *71
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dnd.off_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the DND off code to deactivate the
server-side DND feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
features.dnd.off_code = *72
DND in Custom Mode
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.dnd.enable
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables DND for account X.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone rejects
incoming calls on account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
268
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.dnd.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.dnd.on_code
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Configures the DND on code to activate the
Appendix
server-side DND feature for account X
(optional).
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.dnd.on_code = *73
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.dnd.off_code
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the DND off code to deactivate the
Description
server-side DND feature for account X
(optional).
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.dnd.off_code = *74
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.busy_tone_delay
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a period of time (in seconds) for
which the busy tone is audible on the IP phone.
When one party releases the call, a busy tone
Description
is audible to the other party, indicating that the
call connection breaks.
If it is set to 3, a busy tone is audible for 3
seconds on the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-0s
3-3s
5-5s
269
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Example
features.busy_tone_delay = 3
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.normal_refuse_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Defines return codes and messages when
rejecting an incoming call. A specific return
message is displayed on the caller’s LCD
Description
screen.
If it is set to 486 (Busy here), the caller’s LCD
screen displays the message “Busy here”
when the callee rejects the incoming call.
Format
Integer
Default Value
486
Valid values are:
Range
404-No Found
480-Temporarily not available
486-Busy here
Example
features.normal_refuse_code = 480
Parameter-
Configuration File
phone_setting.is_deal180
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to deal with
the 180 SIP message received after the 183
Description
SIP message.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone resumes
and plays the local ringback tone upon a
subsequent 180 message received.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
Example
270
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
phone_setting.is_deal180 = 1
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
sip.use_out_bound_in_dialog
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to send the
SIP messages to the outbound proxy server.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), all the SIP request
messages from the IP phone will be forced to
send to the outbound proxy server.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
sip.use_out_bound_in_dialog = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.advanced.timer_t1
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the SIP session timer T1 (in
seconds) for account X.
Description
T1 is an estimate of the Round Trip Time (RTT)
of transactions between a SIP client and SIP
server.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Float
Default Value
0.5
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.advanced.timer_t1 = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.advanced.timer_t2
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the session timer T2 (in seconds)
Description
for account X.
T2 represents the maximum retransmitting
271
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
time of any SIP request message. The
re-transmitting and doubling of T1 continues
until the retransmitting time reaches the T2
value.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Float
Default Value
4
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.advanced.timer_t2 = 5
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.advanced.timer_t4
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the session timer of T4 (in
seconds) for account X.
Description
T4 represents the time the network will take
to clear messages between the SIP Client
and SIP Server.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Float
Default Value
5
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.advanced.timer_t4 = 10
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.session_timer.enable
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables the session timer for
account X.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), IP phone sends
periodic re-INVITE requests to refresh the
session during a call.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
272
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Appendix
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.session_timer.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.session_timer.expires
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the IP phone to refresh the session
during a call at regular intervals (in seconds)
for account X.
Description
If it is set to 1800 (1800s), the IP phone
refreshes the session during a call before
1800 seconds.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1800
Range
30 to 7200
Example
account.1.session_timer.expires = 300
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.session_timer.refresher
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the session timer refresher for
account X.
If it is set to 0 (UAC), refreshing the session is
Description
performed by the IP phone.
If it is set to 1 (UAS), refreshing the session is
performed by a SIP server.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-UAC
1-UAS
Example
account.1.session_timer.refresher = 1
273
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.play_hold_tone.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to play a
Description
tone when there is a hold call on the IP
phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.play_hold_tone.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.play_hold_tone.delay
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the interval (in seconds) at which
the IP phone plays a hold tone.
If it is set to 30, the IP phone plays a hold tone
Description
every 30 seconds when there is a hold call
on the IP phone.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“features.play_hold_tone.enable” is set to 1
(Enabled).
Format
Integer
Default Value
30
Range
Not Applicable
Example
features.play_hold_tone.delay = 60
Parameter-
Configuration File
sip.rfc2543_hold
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies whether RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0)
outgoing hold signaling is used.
Description
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), use SDP media
direction attributes (such as a=sendonly) per
RFC 3264 when putting a call on hold.
274
Appendix
If it is set to 0 (Enabled), use SDP media
connection address c=0.0.0.0 per RFC 2543
when putting a call on hold.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
sip.rfc2543_hold = 1
Call Forward Mode
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.fwd_mode
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the call forward mode for the IP
phone.
Description
If it is set to 0 (Phone), call forward feature is
effective for the IP phone.
If it is set to 1 (Custom), you can configure call
forward feature for each account.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Phone
1-Custom
features.fwd_mode = 0
Call Forward in Phone Mode
Always Forward
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.always.enable
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Enables or disables always forward feature.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), incoming call are
forwarded to the destination number
immediately.
Format
Boolean
275
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Default Value
Range
0
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
forward.always.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.always.target
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Description
Defines the destination number of the
always forward.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.always.target = 3601
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.always.on_code
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Configures the always forward on code to
Description
activate the server-side always forward
feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.always.on_code = *72
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.always.off_code
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Configures the always forward off code to
Description
deactivate the server-side always forward
feature.
276
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.always.off_code = *73
Appendix
Busy Forward
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.busy.enable
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Enables or disables busy forward feature.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), incoming calls are
forwarded to the destination number when
the callee is busy.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
forward.busy.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.busy.target
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Description
Defines the destination number of the busy
forward.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.busy.target = 3602
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.busy.on_code
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Configures the busy forward on code to
Description
activate the server-side busy forward
feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.busy.on_code = *74
277
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.busy.off_code
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Configures the busy forward off code to
Description
deactivate the server-side busy forward
feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.busy.off_code = *75
No Answer Forward
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.no_answer.enable
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Enables or disables no answer forward
feature.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), incoming calls are
forward to the destination number after a
period of ring time.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
1-Enabled
Example
forward.no_answer.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.no_answer.target
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Description
278
0-Disabled
Defines the destination number of the no
answer forward.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.no_answer.target = 3603
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.no_answer.timeout
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Defines a period of ring time to wait before
Description
forwarding the incoming call.
The interval of the ring time is n*6 (0≤n≤20),
the valid values ranges from 0 to 20.
Format
Integer
Default Value
2
Range
0 to 20
Example
forward.no_answer.timeout = 5
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.no_answer.on_code
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Configures the no answer forward on code
Description
to activate the server-side no answer
forward feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.no_answer.on_code = *76
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.no_answer.off_code
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Configures the no answer forward off code
Description
to deactivate the server-side no answer
forward feature.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
forward.no_answer.off_code = *77
Call Forward in Custom Mode
Always Forward
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.always_fwd.enable
<MAC>.cfg
279
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Enables or disables always forward feature
for account X.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), incoming calls to the
account X are forwarded to the destination
number immediately.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.always_fwd.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.always_fwd.target
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the destination number of the
Description
always forward for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.always_fwd.target = 3601
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.always_fwd.on_code
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the always forward on code
Description
activate the server-side always forward
feature for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
280
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.always_fwd.on_code = *71
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.always_fwd.off_code
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the always forward off code to
Description
deactivate the server-side always forward
feature for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.always_fwd.off_code = *72
Busy Forward
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.busy_fwd.enable
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables busy forward feature for
account X.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), incoming calls to the
account X are forwarded to the destination
number when the callee is busy.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.busy_fwd.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.busy_fwd.target
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the destination number of the busy
Description
forward for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
281
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Example
account.1.busy_fwd.target = 3602
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.busy_fwd.on_code
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the busy forward on code to
Description
activate the server-side busy forward feature
for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.busy_fwd.on_code = *73
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.busy_fwd.off_code
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the busy forward off code to
Description
deactivate the server-side busy forward
feature for account X (optional).
X ranges from 1 to 6
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.busy_fwd.off_code = *74
No Answer Forward
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.timeout_fwd.enable
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables no answer forward
feature for account X.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), incoming calls to the
account X are forward to the destination
number after a period of ring time.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
282
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Appendix
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.timeout_fwd.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.timeout_fwd.target
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the destination number of the no
Description
answer forward for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.timeout_fwd.target = 3603
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.timeout_fwd.timeout
<MAC>.cfg
Defines a period of ring time to wait before
forwarding the incoming call for account X.
Description
The interval of the ring time is n*6 (0≤n≤20),
the valid values ranges from 0 to 20.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
2
Range
0 to 20
Example
account.1.timeout_fwd.timeout = 5
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.timeout_fwd.on_code
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the no answer forward on code
Description
to activate the server-side no answer
forward feature for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
283
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.timeout_fwd.on_code = *76
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.timeout_fwd.off_code
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the no answer forward off code
Description
to activate the server-side no answer
forward feature for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.timeout_fwd.off_code = *77
Fwd International
Parameter-
Configuration File
forward.international.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to forward
Description
an incoming call to an international phone
number (the prefix is 00).
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
forward.international.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
transfer.blind_tran_on_hook_ena
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
ble
Description
Format
284
Enables or disables the IP phone to complete
the blind transfer through on-hook.
Boolean
Appendix
Default Value
Range
1
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
transfer.blind_tran_on_hook_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
transfer.on_hook_trans_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to complete
Description
the semi-attended transfer or the attended
transfer through on-hook.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
transfer.on_hook_trans_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
transfer.semi_attend_tran_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies whether to display the missed call
prompt on the destination party’s phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
transfer.semi_attend_tran_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.conf_type
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the conference type for account X.
Description
If it is set to 0 (Local Conference), conference
is set up on the IP phone locally.
If it is set to 2 (Network Conference),
285
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
conferences are set up by the server.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-Local Conference
2-Network Conference
Example
account.1.conf_type = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.conf_uri
<MAC>.cfg
Defines the conference URI for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Description
Note: It works only if the parameter
“account.x.conf_type” is set to 2 (Network
Conference).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.conf_uri =
conference@domain.com
Parameter-
Configuration File
transfer.tran_others_after_conf_e
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
nable
Enables or disables the phone to transfer call
to the two parties after a local conference call
hangup.
Description
If it is enabled, the other two parties remain
connected when the conference initiator
drops the conference call.
Note: It is only applicable to the local
conference.
Format
286
Boolean
Appendix
Default Value
Range
Example
0
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
transfer.tran_others_after_conf_enable = 1
Phone Basis
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.pickup.direct_pickup_e
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
nable
Enables or disables the IP phone to display
Description
the DPickup soft key when the IP phone is
off-hook.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.pickup.direct_pickup_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.pickup.direct_pickup_co
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
de
Configures the directed call pickup code on a
phone basis.
Description
Note: The directed call pickup code
configured on a per-line basis takes
precedence over that configured on a phone
basis.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
features.pickup.direct_pickup_code = *97
287
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Per-line Basis
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.direct_pickup_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the directed call pickup code on
a per-line basis.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Description
Note: The directed call pickup code
configured on a per-line basis takes
precedence over that configured on a phone
basis.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.direct_pickup_code = *68
Phone Basis
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.pickup.group_pickup_en
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
able
Enables or disables the IP phone to display
Description
the GPickup soft key when the IP phone is
off-hook.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.pickup.group_pickup_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.pickup.group_pickup_co
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
de
Description
288
Configures the group call pickup code on a
phone basis.
Appendix
Note: The group call pickup code configured
on a per-line basis takes precedence over
that configured on a phone basis.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
features.pickup.group_pickup_code = *98
Per-line Basis
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.group_pickup_code
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the group call pickup code on a
per-line basis.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Note: The group call pickup code configured
on a per-line basis takes precedence over
that configured on a phone basis.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.group_pickup_code = *69
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.dialoginfo_callpickup
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables the phone to pick up a call
according to the SIP header of dialog-info for
account X.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), call pickup is
implemented through SIP signals.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
289
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Example
account.1.dialoginfo_callpickup = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
wui.http_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to access its
web user interface using HTTP protocol.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
wui.http_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.port.http
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the HTTP port used to access the
web user interface of the IP phone.
Description
The default HTTP port is 80.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
80
Range
1 to 65535
Example
network.port.http = 90
Parameter-
Configuration File
wui.https_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to access its
Description
web user interface using HTTPS protocol.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
290
Appendix
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
wui.https_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.port.https
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the HTTPS port used to access the
web user interface of the IP phone.
Description
The default HTTPS port is 443.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
443
Range
1 to 65535
Example
network.port.https = 100
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.cid_source
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the presentation of the caller
identity for account X.
0-FROM (Derives the name and number of
the caller from the “From” header).
1-PAI (Derives the name and number of the
Description
caller from the “PAI” header. If the server
does not send the “PAI” header, displays
“anonymity” on the callee’s phone).
2-PAI-FROM (Derives the name and number
of the caller from the “PAI” header
preferentially. If the server does not send the
“PAI” header, derives from the “From”
291
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
header).
3-RPID-PAI-FROM
4-PAI-RPID-FROM
5-RPID-FROM
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 to 5
Example
account.1.cid_source = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.cp_source
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the presentation of the callee
identity for account X.
0-RPID-FROM (Derives the name and
number of the callee from the “RPID” header
preferentially. If the server does not send the
“RPID” header, derives from the “From”
header).
1-Dialed Digits (Preferentially displays the
dialed digits on the caller’s phone).
Description
2-RFC 4916 (Derives the name and number
of the callee from “From” header in the
Update message).
When the RFC 4916 is enabled on the IP
phone, the caller sends the SIP request
message which contains the from-change
tag in the Supported header. The caller then
receives an UPDATE message from the
callee, and displays the identity in the From
header.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
292
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 to 2
Example
account.1.cp_source = 2
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.dtmf.type
<MAC>.cfg
Specifies the DTMF type for account X.
If it is set to 0 (INBAND), DTMF digits are
transmitted in the voice band.
If it is set to 1 (RFC 2833), DTMF digits are
transmitted by RTP Events compliant to RFC
2833.
Description
If it is set to 2 (SIP INFO), DTMF digits are
transmitted by the SIP INFO messages.
If it is set to 3 (AUTO or SIP INFO), negotiates
with the other end to use INBAND or RFC
2833, if there is no negotiation, using SIP
INFO by default.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Valid values are:
0-INBAND
Range
1-RFC 2833
2-SIP INFO
3-AUTO or SIP INFO
Example
account.1.dtmf.type = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.dtmf.dtmf_payload
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Configures the RFC 2833 payload type.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
101
Range
96 to 127
Example
account.1.dtmf.dtmf_payload = 101
293
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.dtmf.info_type
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the DTMF info type when the
Description
DTMF type is configured as “SIP INFO” or
“AUTO or SIP INFO”.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Valid values are:
Range
1-DTMF-Relay
2-DTMF
3-Telephone-Event
Example
account.1.dtmf.info_type = 3
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dtmf.repetition
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the number of times for the IP
phone to send the end RTP EVENT packet.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3
Range
1 to 3
Example
features.dtmf.repetition = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dtmf.hide
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to suppress
Description
the display of DTMF digits.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the DTMF digits are
displayed as asterisks.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
294
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Appendix
Example
features.dtmf.hide = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dtmf.hide_delay
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to display
the DTMF digits for a short period before
Description
displaying as asterisks.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“features.dtmf.hide” is set to 1 (Enabled).
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.dtmf.hide_delay = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dtmf.replace_tran
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables phone to send DTMF
sequences for transfer function when pressing
the transfer soft key or the transfer key.
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone
Description
performs the transfer as normal when
pressing the transfer key during a call.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone
transmits the specified DTMF digits to the
server for completing call transfer when
pressing the transfer key during a call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
features.dtmf.replace_tran = 1
295
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.dtmf.transfer
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the DTMF digits to be transmitted to
complete the transfer.
Description
Note: It works only if the parameter
“features.dtmf.replace_tran” is set to 1
(Enabled).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Valid values are: 0-9, *, # and A-D.
Example
features.dtmf.transfer = 123
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.intercom.allow
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to
automatically answer an incoming intercom
call.
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone rejects
Description
incoming intercom calls and sends a busy
signal to the caller.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone
automatically answers an incoming intercom
call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.intercom.allow = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.intercom.mute
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to mute the
Description
microphone when answering an intercom
call.
296
Appendix
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the microphone is
un-muted for incoming calls.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the microphone is
muted for intercom calls.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.intercom.mute = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.intercom.tone
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to play a
warning tone when receiving an intercom
call.
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone
Description
automatically answers the intercom call
without a warning tone.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone plays a
warning tone to alert you before answering
the intercom call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.intercom.tone = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.intercom.barge
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to
automatically answer an incoming intercom
call while there is already an active call on
Description
the IP phone.
If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone
handles an incoming intercom call like a
waiting call while there is already an active
call on the IP phone.
297
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone
automatically answers the intercom call while
there is already an active call on the IP phone
and puts the active call on hold.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
features.intercom.barge = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.alert_info_tone
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables and disables the IP phone to
Description
map the keywords in the Alert-info
header to the specified Bellcore ring
tones.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
features.alert_info_tone = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.alert_info_url_enable
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables the distinctive ring
Description
tones by the Alert-Info SIP header for
account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
Example
298
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
account.1.alert_info_url_enable = 1
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.x.text
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the texts to map the keywords
Description
contained in the SIP header.
X ranges from 1 to 10.
Format
Text
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.1.text =
family
Parameter-
Configuration File
distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.x.rin
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
ger
Specifies the desired ring tones for each
text.
Description
The value ranges from 1 to 8, the digit
stands for the appropriate ring tone.
X ranges from 1 to 10.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Valid values are:
1-Ring1.wav
2-Ring2.wav
3-Ring3.wav
4-Ring4.wav
Range
5-Ring5.wav
6-Ring6.wav
7-Ring7.wav
8-Ring8.wav
Ring 6-8 are not applicable to
SIP-T42G/T41P.
Example
distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.1.ringer
=2
299
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.tone.country
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the tone type for the IP phone.
Format
String
Default Value
Custom
Valid values are:
Range
Example
300

Custom

Australia

Austria

Brazil

Belgium

China

Czech

Denmark

Finland

France

Germany

Great Britain

Greece

Hungary

Lithuania

India

Italy

Japan

Mexico

New Zealand

Netherlands

Norway

Portugal

Spain

Switzerland

Sweden

Russia

United States

Chile

Czech ETSI
voice.tone.country = Austria
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.tone.dial
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
voice.tone.ring
voice.tone.busy
voice.tone.congestion
voice.tone.callwaiting
voice.tone.dialrecall
voice.tone.record
voice.tone.info
voice.tone.stutter
voice.tone.message
voice.tone.autoanswer
Customizes the tone for each condition.
tonelist = element[,element] [,element]…
Where
element = [!]freq1[+freq2][+freq3][+freq4]
/duration
Freq: the frequency of the tone (ranges from
200 to 7000 Hz). If it is set to 0 (0Hz), it means
the tone is not played. A tone can be
composited at most four different
frequencies.
Description
Duration: the time duration (in milliseconds,
ranges from 0 to 30000ms) of the ring tone.
You can configure at most eight different
tones for one condition, each tone separated
by comma (e.g. 250/200, !0/1000,
200+300/500, 600+700+800+1000/2000). The
exclamation point (!) can be added
optionally, which means these tones are only
played once.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“voice.tone.country” is set to Custom.
Format
Refer to the introduction above
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
voice.tone.dial = 800+200/1000, 0/100,
500/1200, 500+600+950+1500/5000
301
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
remote_phonebook.data.x.nam
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
e
Description
Specifies the name of the remote phone
book.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
remote_phonebook.data.1.name = yl01
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.remote_phonebook.ena
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
ble
Enables or disables the IP phone to perform a
Description
remote phone book search when receiving
an incoming call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.remote_phonebook.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.remote_phonebook.flas
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
h_time
Specifies how often to refresh the local cache
of the remote phone book.
Description
If it is set to 3600, the IP phone refreshes the
local cache of the remote phone book every
3600 seconds.
302
Format
Integer
Default Value
21600
Appendix
Range
Example
120 to 2592000
features.remote_phonebook.flash_time =
22000
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables LDAP feature on the IP
phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
ldap.enable =1
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.name_filter
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the name attribute for LDAP
searching. The “*” symbol in the filter stands
Description
for any character. The “%” symbol in the filter
stands for the entering string used as the
prefix of the filter condition.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
ldap.name_filter = (|(cn=%)(sn=%))
When the name prefix of the cn or sn of the
Example
contact record matches the search criteria,
the record will be displayed on the LCD
screen.
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.number_filter
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the number attribute for LDAP
searching.
303
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
The “*” symbol in the filter stands for any
character. The “%” symbol in the filter stands
for the entering string used as the prefix of
the filter condition.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
ldap.number_filter =
(|(telephoneNumber=%)(Mobile=%)(ipPho
ne=%))
Example
When the number prefix of the
telephoneNumber, Mobile or ipPhone of the
contact record matches the search criteria,
the record will be displayed on the LCD
screen.
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.host
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
304
Specifies the domain name or IP address of
the LDAP server.
Format
IP Address or Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ldap.host = 192.168.1.20
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.port
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the LDAP server port.
Format
Integer
Default Value
389
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ldap.port = 390
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.base
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Appendix
Specifies the LDAP search base which
corresponds to the location in the LDAP
Description
phonebook from which the LDAP search
request begins. The search base narrows the
search scope and decreases directory
search time.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ldap.base = dc=yealink,dc=cn
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.user
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the user name uses to login the
LDAP server.
Description
This parameter can be left blank in case the
server allows anonymous to login. Otherwise
you will need to provide the user name to
access the LDAP server.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ldap.user = cn=manager,dc=yealink,dc=cn
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.password
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the password to login the LDAP
server.
Description
This parameter can be left blank in case the
server allows anonymous to login. Otherwise
you will need to provide the password to
access the LDAP server.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
305
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Example
ldap.password = secret
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.max_hits
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the maximum number of search
results to be returned by the LDAP server. If
the value of the “Max.Hits” is blank, the
Description
LDAP server will return all searched results.
Please note that a very large value of the
“Max. Hits” will slow down the LDAP search
speed, therefore it should be configured
according to the available bandwidth.
Format
Integer
Default Value
50
Range
1 to 32000
Example
ldap.max_hits = 60
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.name_attr
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the name attributes of each record
to be returned by the LDAP server. It
Description
compresses the search results. You can
configure multiple name attributes
separated by space.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ldap.name_attr = cn sn
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.numb_attr
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the number attributes of each
record to be returned by the LDAP server. It
Description
compresses the search results. You can
configure multiple number attributes
separated by space.
306
Appendix
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ldap.numb_attr = telephoneNumber
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.display_name
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the display name of the contact
Description
record displayed on the LCD screen.
Note: It must start with “%” symbol.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
ldap.display_name = %cn
Example
The cn of the contact record is displayed on
the LCD screen.
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.version
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the LDAP protocol version
Description
supported by the IP phone. Make sure the
protocol value corresponds with the version
assigned on the LDAP server.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3
Range
2 or 3
Example
ldap.version = 3
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.call_in_lookup
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to perform
Description
an LDAP search when receiving an incoming
call.
Format
Boolean
307
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Default Value
Range
0
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
ldap.call_in_lookup = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
ldap.ldap_sort
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to sort the
Description
search results in alphabetical order or
numerical order.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
ldap.ldap_sort = 1
Visual and Audio Alert for BLF Pickup
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.pickup.blf_visual_enabl
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
e
Enables or disables the IP phone to display a
Description
visual prompt when the monitored user
receives an incoming call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
1-Enabled
Example
features.pickup.blf_visual_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.pickup.blf_audio_enabl
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
e
308
0-Disabled
Appendix
Enables or disables the IP phone to play an
Description
alert tone when the monitored user receives
an incoming call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
features.pickup.blf_audio_enable = 1
LED Off in Idle
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.blf_and_callpark_idle_le
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
d_enable
Description
Enables or disables the phone to turn off the
BLF key LED when the monitored user is idle.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
features.blf_and_callpark_idle_led_enable
=1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.music_server_uri
<MAC>.cfg
Specifies the Music on Hold server address.
Examples for valid values: <10.1.3.165>,
10.1.3.165, sip:moh@ucap.com,
Description
<sip:moh@ucap.com>, <yealink.com> or
yealink.com.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Note: The DNS query in this parameter only
supports A query.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
309
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.music_server_uri =<10.1.3.165>
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.acd.enable
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables ACD feature for account
Description
X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Value
0- Disabled
1- Enabled
Example
account.1.acd.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
acd.auto_available
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables ACD auto available
timer feature.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone
automatically changes the phone status to
available.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Value
Example
0- Disabled
1- Enabled
acd.auto_available = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
acd.auto_available_timer
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the length of time (in seconds)
Description
before the IP phone state is automatically
reset to “available”.
Format
310
Integer
Appendix
Default Value
60
Value
0 to 120
Example
acd.auto_available_timer = 80
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.subscribe_mwi
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to
subscribe the message waiting indicator for
account X.
Description
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone sends
a SUBSCRIBE message to the server for
message-summary updates.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Value
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.subscribe_mwi = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.subscribe_mwi_expires
<MAC>.cfg
Configures MWI subscribe expiry time (in
seconds) for account X.
The IP phone is able to successfully refresh
the SUBCRIBE for message-summary events
Description
before expiration of the SUBSCRIBE dialog.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“account.x.subscribe_mwi” is set to 1
(Enabled).
Format
Integer
Default Value
3600
Value
0 to 84600
Example
account.1.subscribe_mwi_expires = 3600
311
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.subscribe_mwi_to_vm
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables a subscription to the
Description
voice mail number for MWI service for
account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Value
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.subscribe_mwi_to_vm = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice_mail.number.x
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the voice mail number for
account X.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“account.x.subscribe_mwi_to_vm” is set to 1
(Enabled).
Format
String
Default Value
Black
Value
Not Applicable
Example
voice_mail.number.1 = 3606
Parameter-
Configuration File
multicast.codec
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies a multicast codec for the IP phone
to use to send an RTP stream.
Format
string
Default Value
G722
Valid values are:
Range
312

PCMU

PCMA
Appendix

G729

G722

G726-16

G726-24

G726-32

G726-40

G723_53
Example
multicast.codec = G722
Parameter-
Configuration File
multicast.receive_priority.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to handle
the incoming multicast paging calls when
there is an active multicast paging call on
Description
the IP phone.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will
answer the incoming multicast paging call
with a higher priority and ignore that with a
lower priority.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
multicast.receive_priority.enable =1
Parameter-
Configuration File
multicast.receive_priority.priority
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Configures the priority of multicast paging
calls.
Description
1 is the highest priority, 10 is the lowest
priority.
If it is set to 0, all incoming multicast paging
calls will be automatically ignored.
Format
Integer
Default Value
10
313
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Range
0 to10
Example
multicast.receive_priority.priority = 10
Parameter-
Configuration File
multicast.listen_address.x.label
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Configures the label to be displayed on the
Description
LCD screen when receiving the RTP
multicast.
X ranges from 1 to 10.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
multicast.listen_address.1.label = 10
Parameter-
Configuration File
multicast.listen_address.x.ip_addr
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
ess
Configures the multicast address and port
number that the IP phone listens to.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 10.
Note: The valid multicast IP addresses
range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
224.5.6.20:10008
Parameter-
Configuration File
action_url.setup_completed =
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
action_url.log_on =
action_url.log_off =
action_url.register_failed =
314
multicast.listen_address.1.ip_address =
Appendix
action_url.off_hook =
action_url.on_hook =
action_url.incoming_call =
action_url.outgoing_call =
action_url.call_established =
action_url.dnd_on =
action_url.dnd_off =
action_url.always_fwd_on =
action_url.always_fwd_off =
action_url.busy_fwd_on =
action_url.busy_fwd_off =
action_url.no_answer_fwd_on =
action_url.no_answer_fwd_off =
action_url.transfer_call =
action_url.blind_transfer_call =
action_url.attended_transfer_call =
action_url.hold =
action_url.unhold =
action_url.mute =
action_url.unmute =
action_url.missed_call =
action_url.call_terminated =
action_url.busy_to_idle =
action_url.idle_to_busy =
action_url.ip_change =
action_url.forward_incoming_call
=
action_url.reject_incoming_call =
action_url.answer_new_incoming_
call =
action_url.transfer_finished =
action_url.transfer_failed =
Specifies the URL for the predefined event.
The value format is: http(s)://IP address of
Description
server/help.xml? variable name=variable
value
Valid variable values are:
315
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones

$mac

$ip

$model

$firmware

$active_url

$active_user

$active_host

$local

$remote

$display_local

$display_remote

$call_id
Format
URL
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Not Applicable
action_url.mute =
Example
http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?model=$mode
l
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.action_uri_limit_ip
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the address(es) from which Action
URI will be accepted.
For discontinuous IP addresses, each IP
address is separated by comma.
For continuous IP addresses, the format likes
*.*.*.* and the “*” stands for the values
0~255.
Description
For example: 10.10.*.* stands for the IP
addresses that range from 10.10.0.0 to
10.10.255.255.
If it is left blank, the IP phone cannot receive
or handle any HTTP GET request.
If it is set to “any”, the IP phone accepts and
handles HTTP GET requests from any IP
address.
Format
316
IP Address
Appendix
Default Value
Blank
Range
IP address or any
Example
features.action_uri_limit_ip = any
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.sip_server.y.address
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the IP address or domain name
Description
of the SIP server.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 2.
Format
IP Address or Domain Name
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
account.1.sip_server.1.address =
Example
sip:user@example.com
account.1.sip_server.2.address =
192.168.1.15
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.sip_server.y.port
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the SIP server port.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 2.
Format
Integer
Default Value
5060
Range
0 to 65535
Example
account.1.sip_server.1.port = 5060
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.sip_server.y.expires
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the registration expiration time
Description
(in seconds).
X ranges from 1 to 6.
317
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Y ranges from 1 to 2.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3600
Range
30 to 2147483647
Example
account.1.sip_server.1.expires = 3500
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.sip_server.y.retry_counts
<MAC>.cfg
It configures the times for the phone to
retransmit the request when the SIP server
Description
is unavailable or there is no respond from
the SIP server.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 2.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3
Range
0 to 20
Example
account.1.sip_server.1.retry_counts = 3
Fallback Mode
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.fallback.redundancy_ty
<MAC>.cfg
pe
Configures the registration mode for the IP
Description
phone in fallback mode.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
0-Concurrent registration: the phone
registers to the working server and fallback
Range
server at the same time.
1-Successive registration: the phone
registers to the working server first. When
the working server fails, the phone
registers to the fallback server.
318
Appendix
Example
account.1.fallback.redundancy_type = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.fallback.timeout
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the time interval (in seconds)
for the IP phone to detect whether the
working server is available by sending the
Description
registration request after the fallback
server takes over the call control.
It is only applicable to the successive
registration mode.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
120
Range
10 to 2147483647
Example
account.1.fallback.timeout = 160
Failover Mode
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.sip_server.y.failback_mo
<MAC>.cfg
de
Configures the way in which the phone fails
back to the primary server for call control
Description
when in the failover mode.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 2.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
0-newRequests: all requests are forwarded
to the primary server first, regardless of the
secondary server that was used.
Range
1-DNSTTL: the IP phone will retry to use the
primary server after the timeout of the
DNSTTL configured for the SIP server.
2-registration: the IP phone will retry to use
the primary server when the SIP server’s
319
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
registration requires renewal.
3-duration: the IP phone will retry to use the
primary server after the timeout defined by
the parameter
“account.x.failback_timeout”.
Example
account.1.sip_server.1.failback_mode = 3
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.sip_server.y.failback_tim
<MAC>.cfg
eout
Configures the time interval (in seconds) for
the IP phone to detect whether the primary
server is available by sending the
registration request after the secondary
server takes over the call control.
If the value is configured to 0, the IP phone
does not detect the primary server until a
failover occurs.
Description
When the value is configured between 1 and
59, the phone automatically sets the time
interval to be 60.
Note: This parameter is only valid when the
parameter
“account.x.sip_server.y.failback_mode” is
configured to 3.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 2.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3600
Range
0 to 65535
Example
account.1.sip_server.1.failback_timeout =
3200
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.sip_server.y.register_on_
<MAC>.cfg
enable
Enables or disables the IP phone to register
Description
to the secondary server before sending
requests to the secondary server in the
320
Appendix
failover mode.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 2.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
account.1.sip_server.1.register_on_enable =
1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.transport
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Configures the transport type for account X.
If it is set to 3 (DNS-NAPTR) and no server
port is given, the IP phone performs the
DNS NAPTR and SRV queries for the
transport protocol, port and IP address.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
Valid values are:
0-UDP
1-TCP
2-TLS
3-DNS-NAPTR
Example
account.1.transport = 3
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.naptr_build
<MAC>.cfg
Specifies the transport protocol the phone
Description
constructs the SRV query for when no
NAPTR records are returned.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
321
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-UDP
1-Multiple Types
Example
account.1.naptr_build = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.lldp.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables LLDP feature on the IP
phone.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
network.lldp.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.lldp.packet_interval
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the amount of time (in seconds)
between the transmissions of LLDP packet.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect. It works only if the parameter
“network.lldp.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
322
Format
Integer
Default Value
60
Range
1 to 3600
Example
network.lldp.packet_interval = 150
Appendix
Internet Port
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vlan.internet_port_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to insert
VLAN tag on packet from the Internet port.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
network.vlan.internet_port_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vlan.internet_port_vid
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the VLAN ID that is associated
with the particular VLAN.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Range
1 to 4094
Example
network.vlan.internet_port_vid = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vlan.internet_port_priority
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the priority value used for passing
VLAN packets.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
323
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 to 7
Example
network.vlan.internet_port_priority = 1
PC Port
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vlan.pc_port_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to insert
VLAN tag on packet from the PC port.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
network.vlan.pc_port_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vlan.pc_port_vid
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the VLAN ID that is associated
with the particular VLAN.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1
Range
1 to 4094
Example
network.vlan.pc_port_vid = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vlan.pc_port_priority
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
324
Specifies the priority value used for passing
VLAN packets.
Appendix
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 to 7
Example
network.vlan.pc_port_priority = 1
DHCP VLAN Discovery
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vlan.dhcp_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables DHCP VLAN discovery
feature on the IP phone.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
network.vlan.dhcp_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vlan.dhcp_option
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the DHCP option from which the
Description
phone will obtain the VLAN settings.
You can configure at most five DHCP options,
and separate options by comma.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
128 to 254
Example
network.vlan.dhcp_option = 132,140
325
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.vpn_enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables VPN feature on the IP
phone.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
network.vpn_enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
openvpn.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the access URL of the OpenVPN
tar package.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
openvpn.url =
http://192.168.10.25/OpenVPN.tar
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.qos.rtptos
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the DSCP for voice packets.
The default DSCP value for RTP packets is
Description
46 (Expedited Forwarding).
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
326
Appendix
Format
Integer
Default Value
46
Range
0 to 63
Example
network.qos.rtptos = 50
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.qos.signaltos
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the DSCP for SIP packets.
The default DSCP value for SIP packets is 26
Description
(Assured Forwarding).
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
26
Range
0 to 63
Example
network.qos.signaltos = 30
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.nat.nat_traversal
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables the NAT traversal for
Description
account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.nat.nat_traversal = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.nat.stun_server
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Specifies the IP address or the domain
327
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
name of the STUN server for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
IP Address or Domain Name
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
account.1.nat.stun_server = 192.168.1.20
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.nat.stun_port
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Specifies the port of the STUN server.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3478
Range
1024 to 65000
Example
account.1.nat.stun_port = 3479
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.snmp.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables SNMP feature on the IP
phone.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
328
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
network.snmp.enable = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.snmp.port
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Appendix
Specifies the port used for SNMP
communication.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
161
Range
0 to 65535
Example
network.snmp.port = 1008
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.snmp.trust_ip
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the SNMP server addresses from
which GET requests will be accepted.
You can specify one or more addresses.
Multiple addresses are separated by
space.
If the value is set to “0.0.0.0”, the IP phone
Description
can accept and handle GET requests from
any IP address.
If the value is left blank, the IP phone cannot
receive or handle any GET request.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address (IPv4 or IPv6) or Domain Name
Default Value
Blank
Range
At most 255 characters
Example
network.snmp.trust_ip = 192.168.1.50
server@manager.com
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.802_1x.mode
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the types of the 802.1X
329
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
authentication to use on the IP phone.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
0-Disabled
Range
1-EAP-MD5
2-EAP-TLS
3-PEAP-MSCHAPV2
4-EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2
Example
network.802_1x.mode = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.802_1x.identity
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enters the identity used for authenticating
the IP phone.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.802_1x.identity = admin
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.802_1x.md5_password
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enters the password used for
authenticating the IP phone.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
Description
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect. It is only applicable to EAP-MD5,
PEAP-MSCHAPV2 and
EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2 protocols.
330
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Appendix
Range
Example
Not Applicable
network.802_1x.md5_password =
admin123
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.802_1x.root_cert_url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the root
certificate used for authentication.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
Description
effect. It is only applicable to EAP-TLS,
PEAP-MSCHAPV2 and
EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2 protocols. The
format of the certificate must be *.pem,
*.crt, *.cer or *.der.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.802_1x.root_cert_url =
http://192.168.1.10/ca.pem
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.802_1x.client_cert_url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the client
certificate used for authentication.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
Description
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect. It is only applicable to the EAP-TLS
protocol. The format of the certificate must
be *.pem or *.cer.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.802_1x.client_cert_url =
http://192.168.1.10/ client.pem
331
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
managementserver.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables TR-069 feature on the IP
phone.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
managementserver.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
managementserver.username
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enters the user name to authenticate with the
ACS. This string is set to the empty string if no
Description
authentication is required.
Note: If you change this parameter, the phone
will reboot to make the change take effect.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
managementserver.username = user1
Parameter-
Configuration File
managementserver.password
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enters the password to authenticate with the
ACS. This string is set to the empty string if no
Description
authentication is required.
Note: If you change this parameter, the phone
will reboot to make the change take effect.
Format
332
String
Appendix
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
managementserver.password = pwd123
Parameter-
Configuration File
managementserver.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the URL of the ACS.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the phone
will reboot to make the change take effect.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
managementserver.url =
http://192.168.1.20/acs/
Parameter-
Configuration File
managementserver.connection
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
_request_username
Configures the user name for the IP phone to
authenticate the incoming connection
Description
requests.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
managementserver.connection_request_usern
ame = acsuser
Parameter-
Configuration File
managementserver.connection
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
_request_password
Configures the password for the IP phone to
Description
authenticate the incoming connection
requests.
333
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
managementserver.connection_request_pass
word = acspwd
Parameter-
Configuration File
managementserver.periodic_in
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
form_enable
Enables or disables the IP phone to
periodically report its configuration
Description
information to the ACS.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
managementserver.periodic_inform_enable =
1
Parameter-
Configuration File
managementserver.periodic_in
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
form_interval
Configures the interval (in seconds) to report
its configuration information to the ACS.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
334
Format
Integer
Default Value
60
Range
5 to 42946967295
Appendix
Example
managementserver.periodic_inform_interval
= 120
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ip_address_mode
<MAC>.cfg
Specifies the IP address mode.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-IPv4
1-IPv6
2-IPv4&IPv6
Example
network.ip_address_mode = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ipv6_internet_port.type
<MAC>.cfg
Specifies the IPv6 address assignment
method.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-DHCP
1-Static
Example
network.ipv6_internet_port.type = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ipv6_internet_port.ip
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Configures the IPv6 address.
335
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.ipv6_internet_port.ip =
2026:1234:1:1:215:65ff:fe1f:caa
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ipv6_prefix
<MAC>.cfg
Specifies the prefix of the IPv6 address.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make change take effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
64
Range
0 to 128
Example
network.ipv6_prefix = 68
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ipv6_internet_port.gat
<MAC>.cfg
eway
Configures the gateway when the Internet port
type is defined as Static IP Address.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
336
network.ipv6_internet_port.gateway =
3036:1:1:c3c7:c11c:5447:23a6:255
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ipv6_primary_dns
<MAC>.cfg
Appendix
Configures the primary DNS server when the
Internet port type is defined as Static IP
Description
Address.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.ipv6_primary_dns = 3036:1:1:c3c7:
c11c:5447:23a6:256
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ipv6_secondary_dns
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the secondary DNS server when
the Internet port type is defined as Static IP
Description
Address.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
network.ipv6_secondary_dns =
2026:1234:1:1:c3c7:c11c:5447:23a6
Parameter-
Configuration File
network.ipv6_icmp_v6.enable
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables ICMPv6 feature.
If it is set to 1 (enabled), the IP phone obtains
network settings of the IPv6 from the ICMPv6
Description
protocol.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
337
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
network.ipv6_icmp_v6.enable = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.headset_prior
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables headset prior feature.
If it is set to 1 (enabled), a user needs to
Description
press the Headset key to activate the
headset mode. The headset mode will not
be deactivated until the user presses the
Headset key again.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.headset_prior = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
features.headset_training
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables dual headset feature.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), users can use two
headsets on one phone. When the IP
Description
phone joins in a cal, the users with the
headset connected to the headset jack
have a full-duplex conversation, while the
users with the headset connected to the
handset jack are only allowed to listen to.
338
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Appendix
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
features.headset_training = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.codec.y.enable
<MAC>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to use the
Description
specific codec for account X.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 14.
Format
Boolean
When Y=1, the default value is 1;
When Y=2, the default value is 1;
When Y=3, the default value is 0;
When Y=4, the default value is 0;
When Y=5, the default value is 1;
When Y=6, the default value is 1;
When Y=7, the default value is 0;
Default Value
When Y=8, the default value is 0;
When Y=9, the default value is 0;
When Y=10, the default value is 0;
When Y=11, the default value is 0;
For T46G:
When Y=12, the default value is 0.
For T42G/T41P:
When Y=14, the default value is 0.
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
account.1.codec.1.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.codec.y.payload_type
<MAC>.cfg
Description
Specifies the codec for account X to use.
339
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 14.
Format
String
When Y=1, the default value is PCMU;
When Y=2, the default value is PCMA;
When Y=3, the default value is G723_53;
When Y=4, the default value is G723_63;
When Y=5, the default value is G729;
When Y=6, the default value is G722;
When Y=7, the default value is iLBC;
Default Value
When Y=8, the default value is G726_16;
When Y=9, the default value is G726_24;
When Y=10, the default value is G726_32;
When Y=11, the default value is G726_40;
For T46G:
When Y=12, the default value is GSM.
For T42G/T41P:
When Y=14, the default value is GSM.
Valid values are:
Range
Example
PCMU

PCMA

G729

G722

G723_53

G723_63

G726_16

G726_24

G726_32

G726_40

iLBC (for SIP-T46G only)

GSM
account.1.codec.1.payload_type =
G723_53
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.codec.y.priority
<MAC>.cfg
Description
340

Specifies the priority for the codec.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Appendix
Y ranges from 1 to 14.
Format
Integer
When Y=1, the default value is 1;
When Y=2, the default value is 2;
When Y=3, the default value is 0;
When Y=4, the default value is 0;
When Y=5, the default value is 3;
When Y=6, the default value is 4;
When Y=7, the default value is 0;
Default Value
When Y=8, the default value is 0;
When Y=9, the default value is 0;
When Y=10, the default value is 0;
When Y=11, the default value is 0;
For T46G:
When Y=12, the default value is 0.
For T42G/T41P:
When Y=14, the default value is 0.
Range
0 to 13
Example
account.1.codec.1.priority = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.codec.y.rtpmap
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the rtpmap.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Y ranges from 1 to 14.
Format
Integer
When Y=1, the default value is 0;
When Y=2, the default value is 8;
When Y=3, the default value is 4;
When Y=4, the default value is 4;
Default Value
When Y=5, the default value is 18;
When Y=6, the default value is 9;
For T46G:
When Y=7, the default value is 106;
When Y=8, the default value is 103;
341
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
When Y=9, the default value is 104;
When Y=10, the default value is 102;
When Y=11, the default value is 105;
When Y=12, the default value is 97.
For T42G/T41P:
When Y=7, the default value is 102;
When Y=8, the default value is 112;
When Y=9, the default value is 102;
When Y=10, the default value is 99;
When Y=11, the default value is 104;
When Y=14, the default value is 97.
Range
0 to 127
Example
account.1.codec.1.rtpmap = 120
Ptime
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.ptime
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the ptime (in milliseconds) for
Description
the codec.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
20
Valid values are:
Range
0 (Disabled)
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
Example
account.1.ptime = 30
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.echo_cancellation
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
342
Enables or disables AEC feature on the IP
phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Appendix
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
voice.echo_cancellation = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.vad
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables VAD feature on the IP
phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
voice.vad = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.cng
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables CNG feature on the IP
phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
voice.cng = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.jib.adaptive
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures the type of jitter buffer.
Format
Integer
343
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Default Value
1
Valid values are:
Range
0-Fixed
1-Adaptive
Example
voice.jib.adaptive = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.jib.min
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the minimum delay time for jitter
Description
buffer.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“voice.jib.adaptive” is set to 1 (Adaptive).
Format
Integer
Default Value
60
Range
60 to 300
Example
voice.jib.min = 100
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.jib.max
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the maximum delay time for
Description
jitter buffer.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“voice.jib.adaptive” is set to 1 (Adaptive).
Format
Integer
Default Value
300
Range
60 to 300
Example
voice.jib.max = 200
Parameter-
Configuration File
voice.jib.normal
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the fixed delay time for jitter
Description
buffer.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“voice.jib.adaptive” is set to 0 (Fixed).
344
Appendix
Format
Integer
Default Value
120
Range
60 to 300
Example
voice.jib.mormal = 100
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.transport
<MAC>.cfg
Configures the transport type for account X.
If it is set to 2 (TLS), the SIP message of this
Description
account will be encrypted after the
successful TLS negotiation.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0 (UDP)
Valid values are:
0-UDP
Range
1-TCP
2-TLS
3-DNS-NAPTR
Example
account.1.transport = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
security.trust_certificates
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to
authenticate the connecting server.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
0-Disabled
345
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
1-Enabled
Example
security.trust_certificates = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
security.ca_cert
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the type of certificates the IP
phone used to authenticate the connecting
Description
server.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-Default certificates
1-Custom certificates
2-All certificates
Example
security.ca_cert = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
security.cn_validation
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enables or disables the IP phone to
mandatorily validate the CommonName or
subjectAltName of the certificate sent by
Description
the connecting server.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
346
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
security.cn_validation = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
security.dev_cert
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Appendix
Specifies the type of certificates the IP
phone sends for authentication.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Default certificates
1-Custom certificates
Example
security.dev_cert = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
trusted_certificates.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the certificate
Description
used to authenticate the connecting server.
Note: The certificate you want to upload
must be in .pem, .crt, .cer or .der format.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
trusted_certificates.url =
http://192.168.1.20/tc.crt
Parameter-
Configuration File
server_certificates.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the certificate
Description
the IP phone sends for authentication.
Note: The certificate you want to upload
must be in .pem or .cer format.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
server_certificates.url =
347
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
http://192.168.1.20/ca.pem
Parameter-
Configuration File
account.x.srtp_encryption
<MAC>.cfg
Configures whether to use voice encryption
service.
If it is set to 1 (Optional), the phone will
Description
negotiate with the other phone what type
of encryption to utilize for the session.
If it is set to 2 (Compulsory), the phone is
forced to use SRTP during a call.
X ranges from 1 to 6.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Value
0-Disabled
1-Optional
2-Compulsory
Example
account.1.srtp_encryption = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_provision.aes_key_in_file
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Enable or disable the IP phone to decrypt
configuration files using the encypted AES
key.
If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will
download <y0000000000xx_Security>.enc
Description
and <MAC_Security>.enc files during auto
provisioning, and then decrypts these files
into the plaintext keys (e.g., key2, key3)
respectively using the phone built-in key
(e.g., key1). The IP phone then decrypts the
encrypted configuration files using
corresponding key (e.g., key2, key3).
348
Appendix
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
auto_provision.aes_key_in_file = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_provision.aes_key_16.com
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the plaintext AES key which is
used to decrypt the <y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
file.
Note: It works only if the parameter
“auto_provision.aes_key_in_file” is set to 0
(Disabled).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Example
16 characters and the supported characters
contain: 0 ~ 9, A ~ Z, a ~ z.
auto_provision.aes_key_16.com =
0123456789abcdef
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the plaintext AES key which is
used to decrypt the <MAC>.cfg file.
Description
Note: It works only if the parameter
“auto_provision.aes_key_in_file” is set to 0
(Disabled).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Example
16 characters and the supported characters
contain: 0 ~ 9, A ~ Z, a ~ z.
auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac =
0123456789abmins
349
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_provision.mode
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the auto provision mode.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Valid values are:
Range
0-Disabled
1-Power on (when the IP phone reboots)
Example
auto_provision.mode = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_provision.pnp_enable
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Enables or disables Plug and Play feature.
Description
If it is set to 1, the phone broadcasts the PnP
SUBSCRIBE message to obtain a
provisioning server address during startup.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
1-Enabled
Example
auto_provision.pnp_enable = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_provision.repeat.enable
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Description
Enables or disables the phone to check new
configuration repeatedly.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
Example
350
0-Disabled
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
auto_provision.repeat.enable = 1
Appendix
Parameter-
Configuration File
auto_provision.weekly.enable
< y0000000000xx >.cfg
Description
Enables or disables the phone to check new
configuration weekly.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
Example
auto_provision.weekly.enable = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
firmware.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the access URL of the firmware.
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
firmware.url =
http://192.168.1.20/2.70.0.50.rom
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan_replace_rule.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the access URL of the replace rule
template.
Format
URL
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dialplan_replace_rule.url =
http://192.168.10.25/dialplan.xml
351
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
dialplan_dialnow.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Specifies the access URL of the dial-now
template.
Format
URL
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dialplan_dialnow.url =
http://192.168.10.25/dialnow.xml
Parameter-
Configuration File
custom_softkey_call_failed.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the customized
Description
file for the soft key presented on the LCD
screen when in the CallFailed state.
Format
URL
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Not Applicable
The following example uses HTTP to
download the CallFailed state file from the
“XMLfiles” directory on provisioning server
Example
10.2.8.16 using 8080 port.
custom_softkey_call_failed.url =
http://10.2.8.16:8080/XMLfiles/CallFailed.xm
l
Parameter-
Configuration File
custom_softkey_call_in.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the customized
Description
file for the soft key presented on the LCD
screen when in the CallIn state.
Format
352
URL
Appendix
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Not Applicable
The following example uses HTTP to
download the CallIn state file from the
Example
“XMLfiles” directory on provisioning server
10.2.8.16 using 8080 port.
custom_softkey_call_in.url =
http://10.2.8.16:8080/XMLfiles/CallIn.xml
Parameter-
Configuration File
custom_softkey_connecting.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the customized
Description
file for the soft key presented on the LCD
screen when in the Connecting state.
Format
URL
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Not Applicable
The following example uses HTTP to
download the Connecting state file from
the “XMLfiles” directory on provisioning
Example
server 10.2.8.16 using 8080 port.
custom_softkey_connecting.url =
http://10.2.8.16:8080/XMLfiles/Connecting.x
ml
Parameter-
Configuration File
custom_softkey_dialing.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the customized
Description
file for the soft key presented on the LCD
screen when in the Dialing state.
Format
URL
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Not Applicable
The following example uses HTTP to
Example
download the Dialing state file from the
“XMLfiles” directory on provisioning server
10.2.8.16 using 8080 port.
353
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
custom_softkey_dialing.url =
http://10.2.8.16:8080/XMLfiles/Dialing.xml
Parameter-
Configuration File
custom_softkey_ring_back.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the customized
Description
file for the soft key presented on the LCD
screen when in the RingBack state.
Format
URL
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Not Applicable
The following example uses HTTP to
download the RingBack state file from the
Example
“XMLfiles” directory on provisioning server
10.2.8.16 using 8080 port.
custom_softkey_ring_back.url =
http://10.2.8.16:8080/XMLfiles/RingBack.xml
Parameter-
Configuration File
custom_softkey_talking.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the customized
Description
file for the soft key presented on the LCD
screen when in the Talking state.
Format
URL
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Not Applicable
The following example uses HTTP to
download the Talking state file from the
Example
“XMLfiles” directory on provisioning server
10.2.8.16 using 8080 port.
custom_softkey_talking.url =
http://10.2.8.16:8080/XMLfiles/Talking.xml
Parameter-
354
Configuration File
Appendix
local_contact.data.url
Description
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the local
contact file.
Format
URL
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
local_contact.data.url =
http://192.168.10.25/contactData1.xml
Parameter-
Configuration File
remote_phonebook.data.x.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the remote XML
Description
phone book.
X ranges from 1 to 5.
Format
URL
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
remote_phonebook.data.1.url =
http://192.168.1.20/phonebook.xml
Parameter-
Configuration File
wallpaper_upload.url
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the access URL of the wallpaper
Description
image.
Note: It is only applicable to the SIP-T46G IP
phone.
Format
URL
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
wallpaper_upload.url =
http://192.168.10.25/wallpaper.jpg
355
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Parameter-
Configuration File
syslog.mode
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the syslog mode.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0-Local
1-Server
Example
syslog.mode = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
syslog.server
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the IP address of the syslog
server where to export the log files.
Description
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
effect.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
syslog.server = 192.168.1.50
Parameter-
Configuration File
syslog.log_level
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the severity level used to specify
the type of syslog information to be
Description
exported.
Note: If you change this parameter, the IP
phone will reboot to make the change take
356
Appendix
effect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3
Range
0 to 6
Example
syslog.log_level = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
watch_dog.enable
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Enables or disables Watch Dog feature.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1
Range
Example
0-Disabled
1-Enabled
watch_dog.enable = 1
This section provides DSS key parameters you can configure on the IP phone.
DSS key can be assigned with various key features. The parameters of the DSS key are
detailed in the following:
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the key feature for the line key.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Valid types are:

Description
N/A (default to line key 7-27 for
SIP-T46G or line key 4-15 for
SIP-T42G/T41P)

Conference

Forward

Transfer

Hold

DND
357
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones

Call Return

SMS (not applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P)

Directed Pickup

Call Park

DTMF

Voice Mail

Speed Dial

Intercom

Line (default for line key 1-6 of SIP-T46G
or line key 1-3 of SIP-T42G/T41P)
Format

BLF

URL

Group Listening

Hot Desking

XML Group

Group Pickup

Multicast Paging

Record

XML Browser

URL Record

LDAP

Prefix

Zero Touch

ACD

Local Group

Keypad Lock

Directory
Integer
SIP-T46G: 15 for line key 1-6, 0 for line key
Default Value
7-27.
SIP-T42G/T41P: 15 for line key 1-3, 0 for line
key 4-15.
Valid values are:
0-N/A
1-Conference
2-Forward
3-Transfer
Range
4-Hold
5-DND
7-Call Return
8-SMS
9-Directed Pickup
10-Call Park
358
Appendix
11-DTMF
12-Voice Mail
13-SpeedDial
14-Intercom
15-Line
16-BLF
17-URL
18-Group Listening
22-XML Group
23-Group Pickup
24-Multicast Paging
25-Record
27-XML browser
34-Hot Desking
35-URL Record
38-LDAP
40-Prefix
41-Zero Touch
42-ACD
45-Local Group
50-Keypad Lock
61-Directory
Example
linekey.1.type = 61
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.line
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the desired line to apply the key
feature.
When Local Group or XML Group is
assigned to the line key, this parameter is
used to specify the desired phonebook (or
group) if multiple phonebooks (or groups)
are configured on the IP phone.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
When assigning the following features, you
don’t need to configure this parameter:

DTMF

Prefix

XML Browser

LDAP
359
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones

Conference

Forward

Hold

DND

Call Return

SMS

Record

URL Record

Multicast Paging

Group Listening

Zero Touch

URL

ACD

Hot Desking

Keypad Lock

Directory
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
When specifying the line, valid values are:
0 to 5 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 2 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Range
For local group and XML group, valid
values are:
0 stands for the first phonebook (or group),
1 stands for the second phonebook (or
group) and so on.
Example
linekey.1.line = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.value
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the value for some key features.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
When Speed Dial is assigned to the line key,
Example
this parameter is used to specify the
number you want to dial out.
360
Appendix
linekey.1.value = 1001
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.extension
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the pickup code for BLF feature.
Description
This parameter only applies to BLF feature.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.1.extension = *88
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.label
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures the label displaying on the LCD
screen for each line key.
Description
This is an optional configuration.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.1.label = Dir
Keypad Lock Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be Keypad Lock
key on the IP phone.
Description
The digit 50 stands for the key type Keypad
Lock.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
361
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Format
Integer
Value
50
Example
linekey.1.type = 50
DND Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be DND key on the
IP phone.
Description
The digit 5 stands for the key type DND.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
5
Example
linekey.1.type = 5
Directed Call Pickup Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be directed call
pickup key on the IP phone.
Description
The digit 9 stands for the key type Directed
Pickup.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
9
Example
linekey.1.type = 9
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.line
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
362
Specifies the desired line to apply the
directed call pickup key.
Appendix
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Valid values are:
Range
0 to 5 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 2 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Example
linekey.1.line = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.value
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the directed call pickup feature
code followed by the number of monitored
Description
extension.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.1.value = *971001
Group Call Pickup Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be group call
pickup key on the IP phone.
Description
The digit 23 stands for the key type Group
Pickup.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
23
Example
linekey.1.type = 23
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.line
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
363
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Specifies the desired line to apply the
Description
group call pickup key.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Valid values are:
Range
0 to 5 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 2 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Example
linekey.1.line = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.value
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the group call pickup feature
Description
code.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.1.value = *98
Call Return Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be call return key
on the IP phone.
Description
The digit 7 stands for the key type Call
Return.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
364
Format
Integer
Value
7
Example
linekey.2.type = 7
Appendix
Call Park Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be call park key on
the IP phone.
Description
The digit 10 stands for the key type Call
Park.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
10
Example
linekey.2.type = 10
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.line
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the desired line to apply the call
Description
park key.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Valid values are:
Range
0 to 5 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 2 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Example
linekey.2.line = 0
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.value
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the call park feature code.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.2.value = *99
365
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Intercom Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be the intercom
key.
Description
The digit 14 stands for the key type
Intercom.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
14
Example
linekey.2.type = 14
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.line
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the desired line to apply the
Description
intercom key.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Valid values are:
Range
0 to 5 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 2 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
Example
linekey.2.line = 1
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.value
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the intercom number.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
366
Format
String
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.2.value = 1008
Appendix
LDAP Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be LDAP key on the
IP phone.
Description
The digit 38 stands for the key type LDAP.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
38
Example
linekey.2.type = 38
BLF Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be BLF key on the
IP phone.
Description
The digit 16 stands for the key type BLF.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
16
Example
linekey.3.type = 16
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.line
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the desired line to apply the BLF
Description
key.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Valid values are:
Range
0 to 5 (for SIP-T46G)
0 to 2 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
367
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Example
linekey.3.line = 2
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.value
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the number of the monitored user.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.3.value = 1008
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.extension
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the pickup code for BLF feature.
This parameter only applies to the BLF
Description
feature.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.3.extension = *88
ACD Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be an ACD key on
the IP phone.
Description
The digit 42 stands for the key type ACD.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
368
Format
Integer
Value
42
Appendix
Example
linekey.2.type = 42
Multicast Paging Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be a multicast
paging key on the IP phone.
Description
The digit 24 stands for the key type
Multicast Paging.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
24
Example
linekey.2.type = 24
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.value
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the multicast IP address and port
number.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Note: The valid multicast IP addresses
range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Format
IP Address
Range
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Example
linekey.3.value = 224.5.5.6:10008
Record Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be a record key on
Description
the IP phone.
The digit 25 stands for the key type Record.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
369
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
25
Example
linekey.2.type = 25
URL Record Key
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Configures a line key to be a URL record
key on the IP phone.
Description
The digit 35 stands for the key type URL
Record.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
35
Example
linekey.2.type = 35
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.value
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Specifies the URL to record a call.
Description
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
String
Default Value
Blank
Range
Not Applicable
Example
linekey.1.value =
http://10.1.2.224/phonerecording.cgi
Hot Desking Key
370
Parameter-
Configuration File
linekey.x.type
<y0000000000xx>.cfg
Description
Configures a line key to be a hot desking
Appendix
key on the IP phone.
The digit 34 stands for the key type Hot
Desking.
X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G).
X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P).
Format
Integer
Value
34
Example
linekey.2.type = 34
371
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
This section describes how Yealink SIP-T4X IP phones comply with the IETF definition of
SIP as described in RFC 3261.
This section contains compliance information in the following:

RFC and Internet Draft Support

SIP Request

SIP Header

SIP Responses

SIP Session Description Protocol (SDP) Usage
The following RFC’s and Internet drafts are supported:

RFC 1321—The MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm

RFC 2327—SDP: Session Description Protocol

RFC 2387—The MIME Multipart / Related Content-type

RFC 2976—The SIP INFO Method

RFC 3261—SIP: Session Initiation Protocol (replacement for RFC 2543)

RFC 3262—Reliability of Provisional Responses in the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

RFC 3263—Session Initiation Protocol (SIP): Locating SIP Servers

RFC 3264—An Offer/Answer Model with the Session Description Protocol (SDP)

RFC 3265—Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) - Specific Event Notification

RFC 3311—The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) UPDATE Method

RFC 3325—SIP Asserted Identity

RFC 3515—The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Refer Method

RFC 3555—MIME Type of RTP Payload Formats

RFC 3611—RTP Control Protocol Extended reports (RTCP XR)

RFC 3665—Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Basic Call Flow Examples

draft-ietf-sip-cc-transfer-05.txt—SIP Call Control - Transfer

RFC 3725—Best Current Practices for Third Party Call Control (3pcc) in the Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP)

RFC 3842—A Message Summary and Message Waiting Indication Event Package
for the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

372
RFC 3856—A Presence Event Package for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Appendix

RFC 3891—The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) “Replaces” Header

RFC 3892—The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Referred-By Mechanism

RFC 3968—The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) Header Field
Parameter Registry for the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

RFC 3969—The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) Uniform Resource
Identifier (URI) Parameter Registry for the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

RFC 4028—Session Timers in the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

RFC 4235—An INVITE-Initiated Dialog Event Package for the Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP)

RFC 4662—Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Event Notification Extension for Resource
Lists

draft-levy-sip-diversion-04.txt—Diversion Indication in SIP

draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt—Implementing Bridged Line Appearances (BLA) Using
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

draft-ietf-sip-privacy-04.txt—SIP Extensions for Network-Asserted Caller Identity
and Privacy within Trusted Networks

draft-levy-sip-diversion-06.txt—Diversion Indication in SIP

draft-ietf-sipping-cc-conferencing-03.txt—SIP Call Control - Conferencing for User
Agents

draft-ietf-sipping-rtcp-summary-02.txt —Session Initiation Protocol Package for
Voice Quality Reporting Event

draft-ietf-sip-connect-reuse-04.txt—Connection Reuse in the Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP)
To find the applicable Request for Comments (RFC) document, go to
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html and enter the RFC number.
The following SIP request messages are supported:
Method
REGISTER
Supported
Notes
Yes
Yealink SIP-T4X IP phones
support mid-call changes
INVITE
Yes
such as putting a call on
hold as signaled by a new
INVITE that contains an
existing Call-ID.
373
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Method
Supported
ACK
Yes
CANCEL
Yes
BYE
Yes
OPTIONS
Yes
SUBSCRIBE
Yes
NOTIFY
Yes
REFER
Yes
PRACK
Yes
INFO
Yes
MESSAGE
Yes
UPDATE
Yes
PUBLISH
Yes
Notes
The following SIP request headers are supported:
Method
374
Supported
Accept
Yes
Alert-Info
Yes
Allow
Yes
Allow-Events
Yes
Authorization
Yes
Call-ID
Yes
Call-Info
Yes
Contact
Yes
Content-Length
Yes
Content-Type
Yes
CSeq
Yes
Diversion
Yes
Event
Yes
Notes
Appendix
Method
Notes
Supported
Expires
Yes
From
Yes
Max-Forwards
Yes
Min-SE
Yes
P-Asserted-Identity
Yes
P-Preferred-Identity
Yes
Proxy-Authenticate
Yes
Proxy-Authorization
Yes
RAck
Yes
Record-Route
Yes
Refer-To
Yes
Referred-By
Yes
Remote-Party-ID
Yes
Replaces
Yes
Require
Yes
Route
Yes
RSeq
Yes
Session-Expires
Yes
Subscription-State
Yes
Supported
Yes
To
Yes
User-Agent
Yes
Via
Yes
The following SIP responses are supported:
1xx Response—Information Responses
1xx Response
100 Trying
Supported
Notes
Yes
375
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
1xx Response
Supported
180 Ringing
Yes
181 Call Is Being Forwarded
Yes
183 Session Progress
Yes
Notes
2xx Response—Successful Responses
2xx Response
Supported
200 OK
Yes
202 Accepted
Yes
Notes
In REFER transfer.
3xx Response—Redirection Responses
3xx Response
Supported
300 Multiple Choices
Yes
301 Moved Permanently
Yes
302 Moved Temporarily
Yes
Notes
4xx Response—Request Failure Responses
4xx Response
400 Bad Request
Yes
401 Unauthorized
Yes
402 Payment Required
Yes
403 Forbidden
Yes
404 Not Found
Yes
405 Method Not Allowed
Yes
406 Not Acceptable
No
407 Proxy Authentication
Required
376
Supported
Yes
408 Request Timeout
Yes
409 Conflict
No
410 Gone
No
411 Length Required
No
Notes
Appendix
4xx Response
Supported
413 Request Entity Too Large
No
414 Request-URI Too Long
Yes
415 Unsupported Media Type
Yes
416 Unsupported URI Scheme
No
420 Bad Extension
No
421 Extension Required
No
423 Interval Too Brief
Yes
480 Temporarily Unavailable
Yes
481 Call/Transaction Does Not
Exist
Notes
Yes
482 Loop Detected
Yes
483 Too Many Hops
No
484 Address Incomplete
Yes
485 Ambiguous
No
486 Busy Here
Yes
487 Request Terminated
Yes
488 Not Acceptable Here
Yes
491 Request Pending
No
493 Undecipherable
No
5xx Response—Server Failure Responses
5xx Response
Supported
500 Internal Server Error
Yes
501 Not Implemented
Yes
502 Bad Gateway
No
503 Service Unavailable
No
504 Gateway Timeout
No
505 Version Not Supported
No
Notes
377
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
6xx Response—Global Responses
6xx Response
600 Busy Everywhere
Yes
603 Decline
Yes
604 Does Not Exist Anywhere
No
606 Not Acceptable
No
SDP Headers
v—Protocol version
o—Owner/creator and session
identifier
Notes
Supported
Yes
Yes
a—Media attribute
Yes
c—Connection information
Yes
m—Media name and transport
address
378
Supported
Yes
s—Session name
Yes
t—Active time
Yes
Appendix
SIP uses six request methods:

INVITE—Indicates a user is being invited to participate in a call session.

ACK—Confirms that the client has received a final response to an INVITE request.

BYE—Terminates a call and can be sent by either the caller or the callee.

CANCEL—Cancels any pending searches but does not terminate a call that has
already been accepted.

OPTIONS—Queries the capabilities of servers.

REGISTER—Registers the address listed in the To header field with a SIP server.
The following types of responses are used by SIP and generated by the IP phone or the
SIP server:

SIP 1xx—Informational Responses

SIP 2xx—Successful Responses

SIP 3xx—Redirection Responses

SIP 4xx—Client Failure Responses

SIP 5xx—Server Failure Responses

SIP 6xx—Global Failure Responses
379
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
The following figure illustrates the scenario of a successful call. In this scenario, the two
end users are User A and User B. User A and User B are located at Yealink SIP IP
phones.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User A calls User B.
2.
User B answers the call.
3.
User B hangs up.
User A
Proxy Server
User B
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 100 Trying
F4. 100 Trying
F5. 180 Ringing
F6. 180 Ringing
F7. 200 OK
F8. 200 OK
F9. ACK
F10. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
F11. BYE
F12. BYE
F13. 200 OK
F14. 200 OK
380
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends a SIP INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 100 Trying response
F3
100 Trying—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 100 Trying
Server
response indicates that the INVITE
request has been received by User B.
The proxy server forwards the SIP 100
F4
100 Trying—Proxy Server to
Trying to User A to indicate that the
User A
INVITE request has been received by
User B.
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
F5
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
Server
response indicates that the User B is
being alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F6
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
381
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F7
200 OK— User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F8
200OK—Proxy Server to User
message to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F9
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server sends the SIP ACK to
F10
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B. The ACK confirms that the proxy
server has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now active.
User B terminates the call session by
F11
BYE—User B to Proxy Server
sending a SIP BYE request to the proxy
server. The BYE request indicates that
User B wants to release the call.
The proxy server forwards the SIP BYE
F12
BYE—Proxy Server to User A
request to User A to notify that User B
wants to release the call.
User A sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F13
200 OK—User A to Proxy
Server
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
indicates that User A has received the
BYE request. The call session is now
terminated.
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
F14
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
OK response to User B to indicate that
B
User A has received the BYE request.
The call session is now terminated.
The following figure illustrates the scenario of an unsuccessful call due to the reason of
the called user being busy. In this scenario, the two end users are User A and User B.
User A and User B are located at Yealink SIP IP phones.
382
Appendix
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User A calls User B.
2.
User B is busy on the IP phone and unable or unwilling to take another call.
The call cannot be set up successfully.
User A
Proxy Server
User B
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 100 Trying
F4. 100 Trying
F5. 486 Busy Here
F6. 486 Busy Here
F7. ACK
F8. ACK
383
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User A sends the INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. Proxy server forwards
the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 100 Trying response
F3
100 Trying—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 100 Trying
Server
response indicates that the INVITE
request has been received by User B.
The proxy server forwards the SIP 100
F4
100 Trying—Proxy Server to
Trying to User A to indicate that the
User A
INVITE request has already been
received.
User B sends a SIP 486 Busy Here
response to the proxy server. The 486
F5
486 Busy Here—User B to
Proxy Server
Busy Here response is a client error
response indicating that User B is
successfully connected but User B is
busy on the IP phone and unable or
unwilling to take the call.
384
Appendix
Step
F6
Action
486 Busy Here—Proxy Server
to User A
Description
The proxy server forwards the 486 Busy
Here response to notify User A that User
B is busy.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F7
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server. The SIP ACK message indicates
that User A has received the 486 Busy
Here message.
The proxy server forwards the SIP ACK
F8
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
to User B to indicate that the 486 Busy
Here message has already been
received.
385
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
The following figure illustrates the scenario of an unsuccessful call due to the reason of
the called user not answering the call. In this scenario, the two end users are User A and
User B. User A and User B are located at Yealink SIP IP phones.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User A calls User B.
2.
User B does not answer the call.
3.
User A hangs up.
The call cannot be set up successfully.
User A
Proxy Server
User B
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 180 Ringing
F4. 180 Ringing
F5. CANCEL
F6. CANCEL
F7. 200 OK
F8. 200 OK
386
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends an INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
F3
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. Proxy server forwards
the INVITE message to User B.
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
Server
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
response indicates that the user is being
alerted.
F4
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
The proxy server forwards the 180
User A
Ringing response to User A. User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
CANCEL—User A to Proxy
User A sends a SIP CANCEL request to
Server
the proxy server after not receiving an
appropriate response within the time
F5
allocated in the INVITE request. The SIP
CANCEL request indicates that User A
wants to disconnect the call.
F6
CANCEL—Proxy Server to
The proxy server forwards the SIP
CANCEL request to notify User B that
387
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
F7
Action
Description
User B
User A wants to disconnect the call.
200 OK—User B to Proxy
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
Server
the proxy server. The SIP 200 OK
response indicates that User B has
received the CANCEL request.
F8
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
A
OK response to notify User A that the
CANCEL request has been processed
successfully.
388
Appendix
The following figure illustrates a successful call setup and call hold. In this scenario, the
two end users are User A and User B. User A and User B are located at Yealink SIP IP
phones.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User A calls User B.
2.
User B answers the call.
3.
User A puts User B on hold.
User A
Proxy Server
User B
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 180 Ringing
F4. 180 Ringing
F5. 200 OK
F6. 200 OK
F7. ACK
F8. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
F9. INVITE B (sendonly)
F10. INVITE B (sendonly)
F11. 200 OK
F12. 200 OK
F13. ACK
F14. ACK
No RTP packets being sent
389
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User A sends an INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
F3
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
Server
response indicates that the user is being
alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F4
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F5
200 OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies the proxy server that the
connection has been made.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F6
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
message to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
390
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F7
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server sends the SIP ACK to
F8
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B. The ACK confirms that the proxy
server has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now active.
User A sends a mid-call INVITE request
F9
INVITE—User A to Proxy
to the proxy server with new SDP
Server
session parameters, which are used to
place the call on hold.
F10
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the mid-call
B
INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F11
200 OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the INVITE is
successfully processed.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F12
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
response to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User B is successfully
put on hold.
User A sends an ACK message to the
proxy server. The ACK confirms that
F13
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
User A has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now
temporarily inactive. No RTP packets
are being sent.
The proxy server sends the ACK
F14
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
message to User B. The ACK confirms
that the proxy server has received the
200 OK response.
The following figure illustrates a successful call between Yealink SIP IP phones in which
parties are in a call, one of the participants receives a call from a third party, then
answers the incoming call. In this call flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B,
and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP
391
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
network.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User A calls User B.
2.
User B answers the call.
3.
User C calls User B.
4.
User B accepts the call from User C.
Proxy Server
User A
User C
User B
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 180 Ringing
F4. 180 Ringing
F5. 200 OK
F6. 200 OK
F7. ACK
F8. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
F9. INVITE A
F10. INVITE A
F11. 180 Ringing
F12. 180 Ringing
F13. INVITE B ( sendonly )
F14. INVITE B ( sendonly )
F15. 200 OK
F316 200 OK
F17. ACK
F18. ACK
No RTP Packets being sent
F19. 200 OK
F20. 200 OK
F21. ACK
F22. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
392
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends an INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
F3
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
Server
response indicates that the user is being
alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F4
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F5
200 OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies proxy server that the connection
has been made.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F6
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
message to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
393
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F7
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server, The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server sends the SIP ACK to
F8
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B. The ACK confirms that the proxy
server has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now active.
User C sends a SIP INVITE message to
the proxy server. The INVITE request is
an invitation to User A to participate in
a call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User A is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User C is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F9
INVITE—User C to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User C is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User A is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F10
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
A
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User A. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User A.
User A sends a SIP 180 Ringing
F11
180 Ringing—User A to Proxy
response to the proxy server. The 180
Server
Ringing response indicates that the user
is being alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F12
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User C. User C
User C
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User A is being alerted.
394
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends a mid-call INVITE request
F13
INVITE—User A to Proxy
to the proxy server with new SDP
Server
session parameters, which are used to
place the call on hold.
F14
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the mid-call
B
INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a 200 OK to the proxy
F15
200 OK—User B to Proxy
server. The 200 OK response indicates
Server
that the INVITE was successfully
processed.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F16
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
response to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User B is successfully
put on hold.
User A sends an ACK message to the
proxy server. The ACK confirms that
F17
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
User A has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now
temporarily inactive. No RTP packets
are being sent.
The proxy server sends the ACK
F18
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
message to User B. The ACK confirms
that the proxy server has received the
200 OK response.
User A sends a 200 OK response to the
F19
200 OK—User A to Proxy
proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies that the connection has been
made.
F20
200 OK—Proxy Server User C
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
message to User C.
User C sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F21
ACK—User C to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User C
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server forwards the SIP ACK
F22
ACK—Proxy Server to User A
to User A to confirm that User C has
received the 200 OK response.
395
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
The following figure illustrates a successful call between Yealink SIP IP phones in which
two parties are in a call and then one of the parties transfers the call to a third party
without consulting the third party. This is called a blind transfer. In this call flow scenario,
the end users are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones,
which are connected via an IP network.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User A calls User B.
2.
User B answers the call.
3.
User B transfers the call to User C.
4.
User C answers the call.
Call is established between User A and User C.
396
Appendix
User A
Proxy Server
User B
User C
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 180 Ringing
F4. 180 Ringing
F5. 200 OK
F6. 200 OK
F7. ACK
F8. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
F9. REFER
F10. 202 Accepted
F11. REFER
F12. 202 Accepted
F17. BYE
F18. BYE
F19. 200 OK
F20. 200 OK
F21. INVITE C
F22. INVITE C
F23. 180 Ringing
F24. 180 Ringing
F25. 200 OK
F26. 200 OK
F27. ACK
F28. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
397
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User A sends an INVITE message to the
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
F3
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
server
response indicates that the user is being
alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F4
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F5
200 OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F6
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
message to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
398
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F7
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server, The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server sends the SIP ACK to
F8
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B. The ACK confirms that the proxy
server has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now active.
User B sends a REFER message to the
F9
REFER—User B to Proxy Server
proxy server. User B performs a blind
transfer of User A to User C.
The proxy server sends a SIP 202 Accept
F10
202 Accepted—Proxy Server
to User B
response to User B. The 202 Accepted
response notifies User B that the proxy
server has received the REFER
message.
F11
REFER—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the REFER
A
message to User A.
User A sends a SIP 202 Accept response
F12
202 Accepted—User A to
to the proxy server. The 202 Accepted
Proxy Server
response indicates that User A accepts
the transfer.
User B terminates the call session by
F13
BYE—User B to Proxy Server
sending a SIP BYE request to the proxy
server. The BYE request indicates that
User B wants to release the call.
F14
BYE—Proxy Server to User A
The proxy server forwards the BYE
request to User A.
User A sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F15
200OK—User A to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
confirms that User A has received the
BYE request.
F16
200OK—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
B
OK response to User B.
User A sends a SIP INVITE request to the
F17
INVITE—User A to Proxy
proxy server. In the INVITE request, a
Server
unique Call-ID is generated and the
Contact-URI field indicates that User A
399
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
requests the call.
F18
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
C
To field to User C.
User C sends a SIP 180 Ringing
F19
180 Ringing—User C to Proxy
response to the proxy server. The 180
Server
Ringing response indicates that the user
is being alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F20
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User C is being alerted
User C sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F21
200OK—User C to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies the proxy server that the
connection has been made.
F22
200OK—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
A
OK response to User A.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F23
ACK— User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server forwards the ACK
F24
ACK—Proxy Server to User C
message to User C. The ACK confirms
that User A has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now active.
The following figure illustrates a successful call between Yealink SIP IP phones in which
two parties are in a call and then one of the parties transfers the call to the third party
with consultation. This is called attended transfer. In this call flow scenario, the end users
are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are
connected via an IP network.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
400
1.
User A calls User B.
2.
User B answers the call.
3.
User A calls User C.
4.
User C answers the call.
Appendix
5.
User A transfers the call to User C.
Call is established between User B and User C.
User A
Proxy Server
User B
User C
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 180 Ringing
F4. 180 Ringing
F5. 200 OK
F6. 200 OK
F7. ACK
F8. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
F9. INVITE B (sendonly)
F10. INVITE B (sendonly)
F11. 200 OK
F12. 200 OK
F13. ACK
F14. ACK
F15. INVITE C
F16. INVITE C
F17. 180 Ringing
F18. 180 Ringing
F19. 200 OK
F20. 200 OK
F21. ACK
F22. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
F23. REFER
F24. 202 Accepted
F25. REFER
F26. 202 Accepted
F31. BYE
F32. BYE
F33. 200 OK
F34. 200 OK
2-way RTP channel established
401
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User A sends an INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
F3
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
Server
response indicates that the user is being
alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F4
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F5
200 OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F6
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
message to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
402
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F7
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server, The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server sends the SIP ACK to
F8
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B. The ACK confirms that the proxy
server has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now active.
User A sends a mid-call INVITE request
F9
INVITE—User A to Proxy
to the proxy server with new SDP
Server
session parameters, which are used to
place the call on hold.
F10
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the mid-call
B
INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F11
200 OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the INVITE was
successfully processed.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F12
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
response to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User B is successfully
put on hold.
User A sends an ACK message to the
proxy server. The ACK confirms that
F13
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
User A has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now
temporarily inactive. No RTP packets
are being sent.
The proxy server sends the ACK
F14
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
message to User B. The ACK confirms
that the proxy server has received the
200 OK response.
User A sends a SIP INVITE request to the
F15
INVITE—User A to Proxy
Server
proxy server. In the INVITE request, a
unique Call-ID is generated and the
Contact-URI field indicates that User A
requests the call.
F16
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server maps the SIP URI to in
the To field to User C. The proxy server
403
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
C
Description
sends the INVITE request to User C.
User C sends a SIP 180 Ringing
F17
180 Ringing—User C to Proxy
response to the proxy server. The 180
Server
Ringing response indicates that the user
is being alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F18
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User C is being alerted.
User C sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F19
200OK—User C to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
F20
200OK—Proxy Server to User
OK response to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F21
ACK— User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server forwards the ACK
message to User C. The ACK confirms
F22
ACK—Proxy Server to User C
that the proxy server has received the
200 OK response. The call session is
now active.
F23
REFER—User A to Proxy
Server
User A sends a REFER message to the
proxy server. User A performs a transfer
of User B to User C.
The proxy server sends a SIP 202
F24
202 Accepted—Proxy Server
to User A
Accepted response to User A. The 202
Accepted response notifies User A that
the proxy server has received the REFER
message.
F25
F26
404
REFER—Proxy Server to User B
The proxy server forwards the REFER
message to User B.
202 Accepted—User B to
User B sends a SIP 202 Accept response
Proxy Server
to the proxy server. The 202 Accepted
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
response indicates that User B accepts
the transfer.
User A terminates the call session by
F27
BYE—User A to Proxy Server
sending a SIP BYE request to the proxy
server. The BYE request indicates that
User A wants to release the call.
F28
BYE—Proxy Server to User B
The proxy server forwards the BYE
request to User B.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F29
200OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that User B has received
the BYE request.
F30
200OK—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
A
OK response to User A.
405
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
The following figure illustrates successful call forwarding between Yealink SIP IP phones
in which User B has enabled always call forward. The incoming call is immediately
forwarded to User C when User A calls User B. In this call flow scenario, the end users
are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are
connected via an IP network.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User B enables always call forward, and the destination number is User C.
2.
User A calls User B.
3.
User B forwards the incoming call to User C.
4.
User C answers the call.
Call is established between User A and User C.
User A
Proxy Server
User B
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 302 Move Temporarily
F4. ACK
F5. 302 Move Temporarily
F6. ACK
F7. INVITE C
F8. INVITE C
F9. 180 Ringing
F10. 180 Ringing
F11. 200 OK
F12. 200 OK
F13. ACK
F14. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
406
User C
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends an INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of the User B is
inserted in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 302 Moved
F3
302 Move Temporarily—User
B to Proxy Server
Temporarily message to the proxy
server. The message indicates that User
B is not available at SIP phone B. User B
rewrites the contact-URI.
The proxy server sends a SIP ACK to
F4
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B, the ACK message notifies User B
that the proxy server has received the
302 Move Temporarily message.
F5
302 Move Temporarily—Proxy
The proxy server forwards the 302
Server to User A
Moved Temporarily message to User A.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F6
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK message notifies the
proxy server that User A has received
the 302 Move Temporarily message.
407
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User A sends a SIP INVITE request to the
F7
INVITE—User A to Proxy
Server
proxy server. In the INVITE request, a
unique Call-ID is generated and the
Contact-URI field indicates that User A
requested the call.
F8
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
C
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User C. The proxy server
sends the SIP INVITE request to User C.
User C sends a SIP 180 Ringing
F9
180 Ringing—User C to Proxy
response to the proxy server. The 180
Server
Ringing response indicates that the user
is being alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F10
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User C is being alerted.
User C sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F11
200OK—User C to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
F12
200OK—Proxy Server to User
OK response to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F13
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server forwards the ACK
message to User C. The ACK confirms
F14
ACK—Proxy Server to User C
that the proxy server has received the
200 OK response. The call session is
now active.
408
Appendix
The following figure illustrates successful call forwarding between Yealink SIP IP phones
in which User B has enabled busy call forward. The incoming call is forwarded to User C
when User B is busy. In this call flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B, and User
C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP network.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User B enables busy call forward, and the destination number is User C.
2.
User A calls User B.
3.
User B is busy.
4.
User B forwards the incoming call to User C.
5.
User C answers the call.
Call is established between User A and User C.
User A
Proxy Server
User B
User C
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 180 Ringing
F4. 180 Ringing
F5. 302 Move Temporarily
F6. ACK
F7. 302 Move Temporarily
F8. ACK
F9. INVITE C
F10. INVITE C
F11. 180 Ringing
F12. 180 Ringing
F13. 200 OK
F14. 200 OK
F15. ACK
F16. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
409
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User A sends the INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
F3
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
Server
response indicates that the user is being
alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F4
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
User B sends a SIP 302 Moved
F5
302 Move Temporarily—User
B to Proxy Server
Temporarily message to the proxy
server. The message indicates that User
B is not available at SIP phone B. User B
rewrites the contact-URI.
The proxy server sends a SIP ACK to
F6
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B, the ACK message notifies User B
that the proxy server has received the
410
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
ACK message.
F7
302 Move Temporarily—Proxy
The proxy server forwards the 302
Server to User A
Moved Temporarily message to User A.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F8
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK message notifies the
proxy server that User A has received
the ACK message.
User A sends a SIP INVITE request to the
F9
INVITE—User A to Proxy
Server
proxy server. In the INVITE request, a
unique Call-ID is generated and the
Contact-URI field indicates that User A
requests the call.
F10
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the SIP
C
INVITE request to User C.
User C sends a SIP 180 Ringing
F11
180 Ringing—User C to Proxy
response to the proxy server. The 180
Server
Ringing response indicates that the user
is being alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F12
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User C is being alerted.
User C sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F13
200OK—User C to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
F14
200OK—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
A
OK response to User A.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F15
ACK— User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
F16
ACK—Proxy Server to User C
The proxy server sends the ACK
message to User C.
411
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
The following figure illustrates successful call forwarding between Yealink SIP IP phones
in which User B has enabled no answer call forward. The incoming call is forwarded to
User C when User B does not answer the incoming call after a period of time. In this call
flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink
SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP network.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User B enables no answer call forward, and the destination number is User C.
2.
User A calls User B.
3.
User B does not answer the incoming call.
4.
User B forwards the incoming call to User C.
5.
User C answers the call.
Call is established between User A and User C.
User A
Proxy Server
User B
F1. INVITE B
F2. INVITE B
F3. 180 Ringing
F4. 180 Ringing
F5. 302 Move Temporarily
F6. ACK
F7. 302 Move Temporarily
F8. ACK
F9. INVITE C
F10. INVITE C
F11. 180 Ringing
F12. 180 Ringing
F13. 200 OK
F14. 200 OK
F15. ACK
F16. ACK
2-way RTP channel established
412
User C
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends the INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. The proxy server
sends the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
F3
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
Server
response indicates that the user is being
alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F4
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
User B sends a SIP 302 Moved
F5
302 Move Temporarily—User
B to Proxy Server
Temporarily message to the proxy
server. The message indicates that User
B is not available at SIP phone B. User B
rewrites the contact-URI.
The proxy server sends a SIP ACK to
F6
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B, the ACK message notifies User B
that the proxy server has received the
413
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
ACK message.
F7
302 Move Temporarily—Proxy
The proxy server forwards the 302
Server to User A
Moved Temporarily message to User A.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F8
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK message notifies the
proxy server that User A has received
the ACK message.
User A sends a SIP INVITE request to the
F9
INVITE—User A to Proxy
Server
proxy server. In the INVITE request, a
unique Call-ID is generated and the
Contact-URI field indicates that User A
requests the call.
F10
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the SIP
C
INVITE request to User C.
User C sends a SIP 180 Ringing
F11
180 Ringing—User C to Proxy
response to the proxy server. The 180
Server
Ringing response indicates that the user
is being alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F12
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User C is being alerted.
User C sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F13
200OK—User C to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
F14
200OK—Proxy Server to User
OK response to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F15
ACK— User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server sends the ACK
F16
ACK—Proxy Server to User C
message to User C. The ACK confirms
that the proxy server has received the
200 OK response.
414
Appendix
The following figure illustrates successful 3-way calling between Yealink SIP-T4X IP
phones in which User A mixes two RTP channels and therefore establishes a conference
between User B and User C. In this call flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B,
and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP
network.
The call flow scenario is as follows:
1.
User A calls User B.
2.
User B answers the call.
3.
User A puts User B on hold.
4.
User A calls User C.
5.
User C answers the call.
6.
User A mixes the RTP channels and establishes a conference between User B and
User C.
415
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
User A
User B
Proxy Server
F1. INVITE B
F4. 180 Ringing
F6. 200 OK
F7. ACK
F2. INVITE B
F3. 180 Ringing
F5. 200 OK
F8. ACK
Session1 established between User A and User B is active
F9. INVITE(sendonly)
Initiate
three party
conference
F10. INVITE (sendonly)
F11. 200 OK
F12. 200 OK
F13. ACK
F14. ACK
Session 1 established between User A and User B is hold
F15. INVITE C
F16. INVITE C
F17. 180 Ringing
F18. 180 Ringing
F20. 200 OK
F19. 200 OK
F21. ACK
F22. ACK
Both calls are active, come into three-party conference
416
User C
Appendix
Step
Action
Description
User A sends the INVITE message to a
proxy server. The INVITE request is an
invitation to User B to participate in a
call session.
In the INVITE request:

The IP address of User B is inserted
in the Request-URI field.

User A is identified as the call
session initiator in the From field.
F1
INVITE—User A to Proxy

Server
A unique numeric identifier is
assigned to the call and is inserted
in the Call-ID field.

The transaction number within a
single call leg is identified in the
CSeq field.

The media capability User A is
ready to receive is specified.

The port on which User B is
prepared to receive the RTP data is
specified.
F2
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
B
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User B. Proxy server forwards
the INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 180 Ringing response
F3
180 Ringing—User B to Proxy
to the proxy server. The 180 Ringing
Server
response indicates that the user is being
alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F4
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User B is being alerted.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F5
200 OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F6
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
message to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
417
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
Step
Action
Description
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F7
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server sends the SIP ACK to
F8
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
User B. The ACK confirms that the proxy
server has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now active.
User A sends a mid-call INVITE request
F9
INVITE—User A to Proxy
to the proxy server with new SDP
Server
session parameters, which are used to
place the call on hold.
F10
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server forwards the mid-call
B
INVITE message to User B.
User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F11
200 OK—User B to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the INVITE is
successfully processed.
The proxy server forwards the 200 OK
F12
200 OK—Proxy Server to User
response to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that User B is
successfully put on hold.
User A sends the ACK message to the
proxy server. The ACK confirms that
F13
ACK—User A to Proxy Server
User A has received the 200 OK
response. The call session is now
temporarily inactive. No RTP packets
are being sent.
The proxy server sends the ACK
F14
ACK—Proxy Server to User B
message to User B. The ACK confirms
that the proxy server has received the
200 OK response.
User A sends a SIP INVITE request to the
F15
INVITE—User A to Proxy
Server
proxy server. In the INVITE request, a
unique Call-ID is generated and the
Contact-URI field indicates that User A
requests the call.
F16
418
INVITE—Proxy Server to User
The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the
To field to User C. The proxy server
Appendix
Step
Action
C
Description
sends the SIP INVITE request to User C.
User C sends a SIP 180 Ringing
F17
180 Ringing—User C to Proxy
response to the proxy server. The 180
Server
Ringing response indicates that the user
is being alerted.
The proxy server forwards the 180
F18
180 Ringing—Proxy Server to
Ringing response to User A. User A
User A
hears the ring-back tone indicating that
User C is being alerted.
User C sends a SIP 200 OK response to
F19
200OK—User C to Proxy
the proxy server. The 200 OK response
Server
notifies User A that the connection has
been made.
The proxy server forwards the SIP 200
F20
200OK—Proxy Server to User
OK response to User A. The 200 OK
A
response notifies User A that the
connection has been made.
User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy
F21
ACK— User A to Proxy Server
server. The ACK confirms that User A
has received the 200 OK response. The
call session is now active.
The proxy server sends the ACK
F22
ACK—Proxy Server to User C
message to User C. The ACK confirms
that the proxy server has received the
200 OK response.
419
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
This section provides the sample configuration file necessary to configure the IP phone.
Any line starts with a pound sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the # is
contained within double quotes. For Boolean fields, 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled.
This file contains sample configurations for the <y0000000000xx>.cfg or <MAC>.cfg file.
The parameters included here are examples only. Not all possible parameters are
shown in the sample configuration file. You can configure or comment the values as
required. The settings in the <y0000000000xx>.cfg file will be overridden by settings in
the <MAC>.cfg file.
T4X Sample Configuration File
#!version:1.0.0.1
#Note: This file header cannot be edited or deleted.
#Network Settings
network.internet_port.type =
#Configure the WAN port type; 0-DHCP, 1-PPPoE, 2-Static IP Address.
#If the WAN port type is configured as DHCP, you do not need to set the
#following network parameters.
#If the WAN port type is configured as Static IP Address, configure the
#following parameters.
network.internet_port.ip =
network.internet_port.mask =
network.internet_port.gateway =
network.primary_dns=
network.secondary_dns =
#If the WAN port type is configured as PPPoE, configure the following
#parameters. It is only applicable to SIP-T46G IP phone.
network.pppoe.user =
network.pppoe.password =
#Dial Plan Settings
dialplan.area_code.code =
dialplan.area_code.min_len =
dialplan.area_code.max_len =
dialplan.area_code.line_id =
dialplan.block_out.number.1 =
dialplan.block_out.line_id.1 =
dialplan.dialnow.rule.X =
dialplan.dialnow.line_id.X =
420
Appendix
dialplan.replace.prefix.X =
dialplan.replace.replace.X =
dialplan.replace.line_id.X =
#Time Settings
local_time.time_zone =
local_time.time_zone_name =
local_time.ntp_server1 =
local_time.ntp_server2 =
local_time.interval =
local_time.dhcp_time =
#Use the following parameters to set the time and date manually.
local_time.manual_time_enable =
local_time.date_format =
local_time.time_format =
#Auto DST Settings
local_time.summer_time =
local_time.dst_time_type =
local_time.start_time =
local_time.end_time =
local_time.offset_time =
#Phone Lock
phone_setting.lock =
phone_setting.phone_lock.unlock_pin =
phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_time_out =
#Language
lang.wui =
lang.gui =
#Call Waiting
call_waiting.enable =
call_waiting.tone =
#Auto Redial
auto_redial.enable =
auto_redial.interval =
auto_redial.times =
#Call Hold
features.play_hold_tone.enable =
features.play_hold_tone.delay =
421
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
sip.rfc2543_hold =
#Hotline
features.hotline_number =
features.hotline_delay =
#Web Server Type
wui.http_enable =
network.port.http =
wui.https_enable =
network.port.https =
#DTMF Suppression
features.dtmf.hide =
features.dtmf.hide_delay =
#Call Forward
# In Phone Mode
features.fwd_mode = 0
forward.always.enable =
forward.always.target =
forward.always.on_code =
forward.always.off_code =
forward.busy.enable =
forward.busy.target =
forward.busy.on_code =
forward.busy.off_code =
forward.no_answer.enable =
forward.no_answer.target =
forward.no_answer.timeout =
forward.no_answer.on_code =
forward.no_answer.off_code =
# In Custom Mode
features.fwd_mode = 1
account.1.always_fwd.enable =
account.1.always_fwd.target =
account.1.always_fwd.on_code =
account.1.busy_fwd.off_code =
account.1.busy_fwd.enable =
account.1.busy_fwd.target =
account.1.busy_fwd.on_code =
account.1.busy_fwd.off_code =
account.1.timeout_fwd.enable =
422
Appendix
account.1.timeout_fwd.target =
account.1.timeout_fwd.timeout =
account.1.timeout_fwd.on_code =
account.1.timeout_fwd.off_code =
#Call Transfer
transfer.semi_attend_tran_enable =
transfer.blind_tran_on_hook_enable =
transfer.on_hook_trans_enable =
transfer.tran_others_after_conf_enable =
#Call Conference
account.1.conf_type =
account.1.conf_uri =
#DTMF
account.1.dtmf.type =
account.1.dtmf.dtmf_payload =
account.1.dtmf.info_type =
#Distinctive Ring Tones
account.1.alert_info_url_enable =
distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.1.text =
distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.1.ringer =
#Tones
voice.tone.dial =
voice.tone.ring =
voice.tone.busy =
voice.tone.congestion =
voice.tone.callwaiting =
voice.tone.dialrecall =
voice.tone.record =
voice.tone.info =
voice.tone.stutter =
voice.tone.message =
voice.tone.autoanswer =
#Remote Phone Book
features.remote_phonebook.enable =
features.remote_phonebook.flash_time =
#LDAP
ldap.name_filter =
423
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
ldap.number_filter =
ldap.host = 0.0.0.0
ldap.port = 389
ldap.base =
ldap.user =
ldap.password =
ldap.max_hits =
ldap.name_attr =
ldap.numb_attr =
ldap.display_name =
ldap.version =
ldap.call_in_lookup =
ldap.ldap_sort =
#Action URL
action_url.setup_completed =
action_url.log_on =
action_url.log_off =
action_url.register_failed =
action_url.off_hook =
action_url.on_hook =
action_url.incoming_call =
action_url.outgoing_call =
action_url.call_established =
action_url.dnd_on =
action_url.dnd_off =
action_url.always_fwd_on =
action_url.always_fwd_off =
action_url.busy_fwd_on =
action_url.busy_fwd_off =
action_url.no_answer_fwd_on =
action_url.no_answer_fwd_off =
action_url.transfer_call =
action_url.blind_transfer_call =
action_url.attended_transfer_call =
action_url.hold =
action_url.unhold =
action_url.mute =
action_url.unmute =
action_url.missed_call =
424
Appendix
action_url.call_terminated =
action_url.busy_to_idle =
action_url.idle_to_busy =
action_url.ip_change =
action_url.forward_incoming_call =
action_url.reject_incoming_call =
action_url.answer_new_incoming_call =
action_url.transfer_finished =
action_url.transfer_failed =
#SNMP
network.snmp.enable =
network.snmp.port =
network.snmp.trust_ip =
#Access URL of Resource Files
dialplan_dialnow.url =
dialplan_replace_rule.url =
local_contact.data.url =
remote_phonebook.data.1.url =
wallpaper_upload.url =
425
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
426
Index
Numeric
C
180 Ring Workaround
79
Call Completion
802.1x Authentication
172
Call Forward
Call Hold
A
Call Log
About This Guide
Acoustic Echo Cancellation
147
Action URI
150
Administrator Password
Always Forward
Call Return
39
Audio Codecs
91
65
Blind Transfer
Block Out
420
Busy Forward
86
Busy Lamp Field
128
Busy Tone Delay
77
33
Connect the Network and Power
Connecting the IP phone
17
10
9
25
28
133
212
Directed Call Pickup
94
Distinctive Ring Tones
117
Do Not Disturb (DND)
73
v
108
Dual Headset
31
117
Configuring Basic Network Parameters
DTMF
91
13
Configuring Basic Features
Documentations
36
191
14
Dial-now Template
B
Backlight
222
Configuring Advanced features
Dial-now
Automatic Call Distribution
106
D
185
66
Auto Redial
63
Creating Dial Plan
9
Attended Transfer
Auto Answer
234
379
30
Attach the Stand
63
Configuration Methods
231
Appendix F: Sample Configuration File
Area Code
Call Waiting
Comfort Noise Generation
372
Appendix E: SIP Call Flows
91
Configuration Files
Appendix C: Configuration Parameters
Appendix D: SIP
Call Transfer
Capturing Packets
71
229
Appendix B: Time Zones
102
Connected Line Identification Presentation 106
229
Appendix A: Glossary
142
Calling Line Identification Presentation
223
69
Anonymous Call Rejection
103
Call Waiting Tone
Analyzing the Configuration Files
Appendix
84
58
Call Recording
189
86
Anonymous Call
86
Call Park/Retrieve
v
Action URL
68
184
E
Early Media
79
Encrypting Configuration Files
Enabling the Watch Dog Feature
203
222
427
Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T4X IP Phones
G
N
Getting Information from Status Indicators 223
NAT Traversal
Getting Started
Network Address Translation (NAT)
9
Group Call Pickup
97
168
Network Conference
168
92
No Answer Forward
86
H
H.323
P
1
Headset Prior
Hotline
183
Phone Lock
56
40
Phone User Interface
Hot Desking
145
13
Physical Features of SIP-T4X IP Phones
Product Overview
4
1
I
In This Guide
Index
Q
v
427
Quality of Service
Initialization Process Overview
Intercom
11
113
IPv6 Support
165
R
178
Reading Icons
15
Remote Phone Book
J
123
Remote XML Phonebook
Jitter Buffer
192
Replace Rule
26
Replace Rule Template
K
Return Code When Refuse
54
Key Features of SIP-T4X IP Phones
4
Language
78
RFC and Internet Draft Support
Security Features
47
372
Server Redundancy
63
Session Timer
157
Loading Language Packs
Local Contact File
Local Directory
SIP
48
SIP Request
373
375
SIP IP Phone Models
Management Information Bases
Message Waiting Indicator
Multicast Paging
379
SIP Responses
M
Missed Call Log
2
374
SIP Call Flows
50
152
1
SIP Header
60
59
137
131
135
170
91
82
SIP Components
215
Logo Customization
Music on Hold
195
Semi-attended Transfer
125
Live Dialpad
428
73
S
L
LLDP
211
Return Message When DND
Key as Send
LDAP
216
3
SIP Session Description Protocol Usage
SIP Session Timer
SNMP
81
170
Softkey Layout
50
Specifying the Language to Use
49
378
Index
SRTP
201
STUN Server
168
Suppressing DTMF Display
111
T
Table of Contents
Time and Date
ix
42
Transfer on Conference Hang Up
Transfer via DTMF
112
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
Troubleshooting
93
195
219
Troubleshooting Methods
219
Troubleshooting Solutions
224
TR-069 Device Management
176
U
Upgrading Firmware
207
Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog
User Agent Client (UAC)
2
User Agent Server (UAS)
3
User Password
80
38
V
Verifying Startup
Viewing Log Files
VLAN
13
219
160
Voice Activity Detection
VoIP Principle
VPN
190
1
163
W
Wallpaper
34
Web Server Type
Web User Interface
104
14
429
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising